Nissan Paint Sprayer Z33 D User Manual

2006.5

350Z

OWNER'S MANUAL

(For vehicles equipped with NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive harm. In

addition, certain fluids contained in ve-

hicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm.

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

SIC0697

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

CAUTION

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

this” or “Do not let this happen”.

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your

vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the

procedures must be followed carefully.

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,

may contain perchlorate material. The following

advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material —

special handling may apply.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.”

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

TOKYO, JAPAN

reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted

in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior

written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer

are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephone

number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

You can write to NISSAN with the information

on the left at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN37068-5003

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio

systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints .......................... 0-2

Exterior front ........................................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ............................................................................ 0-4

Coupe models .................................................................. 0-4

Roadster models .............................................................. 0-5

Passenger compartment ...................................................... 0-6

Coupe models .................................................................. 0-6

Roadster models .............................................................. 0-8

Instrument panel ................................................................. 0-10

Engine compartment ......................................................... 0-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(Page 1-28)

2. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags*

(P.1-28)

3. Seat belts (P.1-10)

4. Seats (P.1-2)

— Child restraints (P.1-17)

5. Head restraints (P.1-9)

6. Child restraint anchor point* (for top tether

strap child restraint) (P.1-24)

7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor)

— Advanced air bag system (P.1-35)

8. Supplemental side air bags* (P.1-28)

9. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-42)

*: if so equipped

SSI0255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Hood (P.3-8)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch (P.2-22)

— Wiper replacement (P.8-20)

— Washer fluid (P.8-14)

3. Power windows (P.2-39)

— Automatic adjusting function (P.2-41,

P.8-15)

4. Recovery hook installation (P.6-12)

License plate installation (P.9-13)

5. Headlight, park and turn signal lights

— Switch (P.2-25)

— Bulb(P.8-27)

6. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-30, P.9-9)

— Flat tire (P.6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(P.2-14, P.5-3)

7. Outside mirrors (P.3-27)

8. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-3)

— Keyfob(P.3-5)

SSI0151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

COUPE MODELS

1. Antenna (P.4-30)

2. Rear hatch release switch (P.3-9)

3. Rear window defroster (P.2-24)

4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

5. Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-13)

6. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch (P.2-23)

— Washer fluid (P.8-14)

7. License plate lights (Bulb) (P.8-28)

8. Rear hatch release (secondary) (P.3-10)

9. Luggage compartment light (P.2-42, P.8-28)

10. Back-up, Turn signal light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

11. Side marker, Stop/Tail light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

12. Fuel

— Fuel-filler door (P.3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

*: if so equipped

SSI0152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Antenna (P.4-30)

2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-10)

3. Trunk light (P.2-43, P.8-28)

4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

5. Rear window defroster (P.2-24)

6. Soft top (P.3-13)

7. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-11)

8. License plate lights (Bulb) (P.8-28)

9. Back-up, Turn signal light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

10. Side marker, Stop/Tail light (Bulb) (P.8-28)

11. Fuel

— Fuel-filler door (P.3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

SSI0003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

COUPE MODELS

1. Coat hook (P.2-39)

2. Seat belts (P.1-10)

3. Seats

— Manual seats adjustment (P.1-3)

— Power seats adjustment (P.1-3)

4. Passenger seat

— Tilt lever for passenger seat (seatback)

(P.1-7)

5. Power window switch (P.2-39)/Power door

lock switch (P.3-4)

6. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-27)

7. Sun visor (P.3-25)

8. Interior light (P.2-41)

9. Sunglasses holder (P.2-34)

10. Inside mirror (P.3-26)

— Automatic anti-glare inside mirror*

(P.3-26)

— HomeLink universal transceiver*

(P.2-43)

11. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-37)

12. Rear parcel box (P.2-37)

13. Rear parcel box or Navigation system*1

14. Rear floor box (P.2-36)

15. Power outlet (P.2-32)

16. Console box (P.2-36)

17. Parking brake

— Operation (P.5-15)

— Parking/Parking on hills (P.5-19)

SSI0256

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

— Checking (P.8-21)

18. Selector lever or shift lever

— Automatic transmission (P.5-9)

— Manual transmission (P.5-13)

19. Cargo net (P.2-34)

*: if so equipped

*1: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Seat belts (P.1-11)

2. Seats

— Power seats adjustment (P.1-4)

— Ventilated net seats* (P.1-6)

3. Passenger seat

— Power seatback tilt switch (P.1-7)

— Cancel switch (P.1-8)

4. Power window switch (P.2-39)/Power door

lock switch (P.3-4)

5. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-27)

6. Soft top latch lever (P.3-16)

7. Safety switch for soft top latch lever (P.3-16)

8. Interior light (P.2-41)

9. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-37)

10. Inside mirror (P.3-26)

— Automatic anti-glare inside mirror*

(P.3-26)

— HomeLink universal transceiver*

(P.2-43)

11. Rear parcel box (P.2-37)

12. Rear parcel box or Navigation system*1

13. Rear floor box (P.2-36)

— Trunk lid cancel switch (P.3-11)

— Secondary trunk lid release (P.3-12)

14. Power outlet (P.2-32)

15. Console box (P.2-36)

16. Parking brake

— Operation (P.5-15)

— Parking/Parking on hills (P.5-19)

— Checking (P.8-21)

SSI0257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

17. Selector lever or shift lever

— Automatic transmission (P.5-9)

— Manual transmission (P.5-13)

18. Cargo net (P.2-34)

*: if so equipped

*1: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

INSTRUMENT PANEL

9. Center ventilator (P.4-8)

10. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-28)

11. Side ventilators (P.4-8)

12. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster

models) (P.3-13)

13. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) OFF switch*

(P.2-29) or TCS (Traction control system)

OFF switch* (P.2-30)

14. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-23)

15. Hood lock release handle (P.3-8)

16. Fuse box (P.8-24)

17. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-25)

18. Ignition switch (P.5-6)

19. Navigation system display (P.4-2)*1 or In-

strument pocket (P.2-33)

20. Audio system (P.4-12)/Clock (P.2-31)

21. Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch (P.2-24)

22. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-28)

23. Cup holder (P.2-35)

24. Heated seat switch* (P.2-29)

25. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-9)

26. Power outlet (P.2-32)

SIC3266

*: if so equipped

1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P.2-25)

2. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-27)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-28)/Horn

(P.2-28)

*1: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)

6. Cruise control main/set switch* (P.5-16)

7. Trip computer mode/setting switch (P.2-8)

8. Wiper/washer switch (P.2-22)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control*

(P.4-29)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-23)

2. Battery (P.8-15)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T models) (P.8-13)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10)

11. Air cleaner (P.8-18)

Do not tamper with the strut tower bar

adjustment k. The strut tower bar has

been adjusted to the most suitable posi-

tion at the factory.

SDI1519

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system

Seats ........................................................................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............... 1-14

Seat belt extenders ...................................................... 1-16

Seat belt maintenance ................................................ 1-16

Child restraints ................................................................... 1-17

Precautions on child restraints ................................. 1-17

Child restraint installation on front passenger

(for Coupe models) ........................................................ 1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(for Coupe models — if so equipped) ...................... 1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(for Roadster models) .................................................... 1-4

Seat lifter (for driver’s seat) ......................................... 1-6

Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driver’s

seat ..................................................................................... 1-7

Head restraint adjustment ............................................ 1-9

Active head restraint (except for ventilated net

seats) ................................................................................ 1-10

Seat belts ............................................................................. 1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage ................................ 1-10

Child safety .................................................................... 1-12

Pregnant women .......................................................... 1-13

Injured persons ............................................................. 1-14

seat (Coupe models only) .......................................... 1-20

Top tether strap child restraint

(Coupe models only) ................................................... 1-24

Booster seats ....................................................................... 1-25

Precautions on booster seats .................................... 1-25

Booster seat installation on front passenger

seat.................................................................................... 1-27

Supplemental restraint system ....................................... 1-28

Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-28

Supplemental air bag warning labels ...................... 1-43

Supplemental air bag warning light ......................... 1-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEATS

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

SSS0133

For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly. See “Precautions on seat

belt usage” later in this section.

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

belt and receive serious internal

injuries.

After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

Do not leave children unattended in-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (for Coupe models —

if so equipped)

Operating tips

The seat motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops during

operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate

the switch.

Do not operate the power support seat

for a long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

SSS0394

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

k Reclining

ADJUSTMENT (for Coupe models)

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward again,

pull the lever and move your body forward. The

seatback will move forward.

k Forward and backward

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward

or backward to the desired position. Release the

lever to lock the seat in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section. The seatback may also be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is parked.

When sliding the passenger’s seat backward,

be careful not to crush items in the seatback

pocket against the rear floor box.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (for Roadster models)

Operating tips

The seat motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops during

operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate

the switch.

Do not operate the power support seat

for a long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

SPA1793

k Forward and backward

k Reclining (for passenger’s seat)

Moving the sliding switch forward or backward

will slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

The passenger’s seat is equipped with a manual

lever for reclining. See “Front manual seat ad-

justment” earlier in this section.

When sliding the passenger’s seat backward,

be careful not to crush items in the seatback

pocket against the rear floor box.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section. The seatback may also be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is parked.

k Reclining (for driver’s seat)

Move the reclining switch backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward, move the switch forward and move your

body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

cancel switch to the CANCEL position. For more

information about operation conditions, see

“Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section. For the cancel switch, see

“Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driv-

er’s seat” later in this section.

SSS0472

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section. The seatback may also be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is parked.

k Forward and backward

Moving the sliding switch forward or backward

will slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

When sliding the passenger’s seat backward,

be careful not to crush items in the seatback

pocket against the rear floor box.

Automatic passenger seatback tilt

function

k Reclining

The passenger seatback will automatically tilt

forward and backward during the soft top

open/close operation. If you need to cancel this

function or when a child restraint is installed in

the passenger’s seat, push the seatback tilt

Move the reclining switch backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward, move the switch forward and move your

body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

When using these seats, avoid wear-

ing clothing with soft fabrics (wool,

etc.). Clothing may be damaged as it

rubs against the netted material.

SSS0272

SPA1715

Type A

Ventilated net seats (if so equipped)

SEAT LIFTER (for driver’s seat)

The ventilated net seats are designed for good

ventilation while driving. Net cloth is used on the

surface of the seatback and the cushion as

shown.

Type A (except for ventilated net seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of

the seat cushion to the desired position.

CAUTION

The seat is made of netted materials.

Be careful not to snag your jewelry,

such as a ring, bracelet or watch, on

the seat.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0202

SSS0203

SSS0273

Type B

Roadster models — Type A

Roadster models (power type)

Type B (for ventilated net seat)

TILTING AND^CR^ouE^pC^{e m}L^oIN^deI^lN^sG

PASSENGER’S SEAT FROM

DRIVER’S SEAT

Turn the dial and adjust the angle of the seat

cushion to the desired position.

The power seatback tilt switch k and the

seatback tilt cancel switch k are located on the

back side of the passenger seatback as shown.

Tilting/reclining operation:

The passenger seatback can be adjusted from

the driver’s seat to make it easier for the driver to

use the rear parcel box or rear floor box, or to

help the passenger get in the vehicle.

To tilt the passenger seatback forward, push the

top (

side) of the power seatback tilt

Coupe models (manual type)

switch k for more than 0.5 second. The seat-

back will automatically tilt forward. To stop the

movement, push the top or bottom of the switch.

To tilt or recline the passenger seatback, pull up

the lever k located on the back side of it, and

move the seatback forward or backward.

To tilt or adjust the seatback backward, push

and hold the bottom (

side) of the power

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

switch” later in this section.)

when the passenger seat belt is fastened.

when the vehicle speed reaches 4 MPH (7

km/h) and more.

The automatic tilting/reclining movement will be

stopped:

when any of the above 4 conditions occur.

when the power seatback tilt switch (top or

bottom) is pushed again.

when the seatback is moved with the soft top

open/close operation.

SSS0274

SSS0275

When this interruption occurs, you cannot move

the seatback backward from the stopped posi-

tion with the power seatback tilt switch. Use the

reclining switch (on the seat cushion) to select

the seatback position.

Roadster models — Type B

seatback tilt switch. While the switch is held

down, the seatback will move backward to the

original position that was last selected using the

reclining switch (located on the seat cushion).

Release the switch to stop the movement.

Seatback tilt cancel switch:

When the seatback tilt cancel switch k is

pushed to the CANCEL position, the

tilting/reclining operation using the power seat-

back tilt switch k will be cancelled. Only the

sliding/reclining switches (located on the seat

cushion) are operational. Push the seatback tilt

cancel switch to the AUTO position to reactivate

the power seatback tilt switch.

Operation conditions:

The power seatback tilt switch does not activate

under the following conditions.

when the passenger seat sliding/reclining

switches on the seat cushion are being op-

erated.

This cancel switch is linked with the automatic

passenger seatback tilt function of the soft top

operation. See “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section.

when the seat tilt cancel switch is in the

CANCEL position. (See “Seatback tilt cancel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When a child restraint is installed in the

passenger seat, be sure to turn the seat-

back tilt cancel switch to the CANCEL

position. Otherwise, the child restraint

may be damaged.

SSS0204

SSS0178A

Adjust the head restraints so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To

lower, push the lock knob k and push the head

WARNING

restraint down.

The ventilated net seats (if so equipped for

Roadster models) have non-adjustable head

restraints.

Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide significant

protection against injury in an accident.

Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

ment after someone else uses the seat.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

Always wear seat belts. No system

can prevent all injuries in any acci-

dent.

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back

in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly

reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and

all of your passengers to buckle up every time

you drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Do not attach anything to the head

restraint stalks. Doing so could im-

pair active head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing the

force that the seatback receives from the occu-

pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the

head restraint helps support the occupant’s

head by reducing its backward movement and

helping absorb some of the forces that may lead

to whiplash type injuries.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories require that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0508

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (except

for ventilated net seats)

Active head restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

WARNING

Active head restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Always adjust the head restraints

properly as specified in the previous

section. Failure to do so can reduce

the effectiveness of the active head

restraint.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as

described in the previous section.

Active head restraints are designed

to supplement other safety systems.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal

injuries in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

SSS0136

Never carry more people in the ve-

hicle than there are seat belts. This

vehicle has only two seating posi-

tions. Never allow anyone to ride in

the luggage area.

an accident. Serious injury or death

can occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ONwith all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may indi-

cate a malfunction in the system.

The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in

Have the system checked by

NISSAN dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

Rear facing child restraint (should not be

installed in this vehicle)

SSS0134

Front facing child restraint (should not be

installed in the Roadster models)

Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.

semblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use dur-

ing a collision should also be in-

spected and replaced if either dam-

age or improper operation is noted.

Booster seat

Removal and installation of the pre-

tensioner seat belt system compo-

nents should be done by a NISSAN

dealer.

WARNING

Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear facing child restraint

ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to

hold a child in your lap or arms.

All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

recommends that all seat belt as-

Roadster models do not have an an-

chor for a top tether strap required

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

transported in this vehicle.

Larger children

for most front facing child restraints.

Never let children who require the

use of a front facing child restraint

ride in Roadster models.

All US states and provinces of Canada require

the use of approved child restraints for infants

and small children. (See “Child restraints” later in

this section.)

Children who are too large for child restraint

systems should be seated and restrained by the

seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may

not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18

kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be

used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

Children need special protection. The

vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them

properly. The shoulder belt may come

too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious

or fatal injury. Always use appropri-

ate child restraints.

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional protec-

tion.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the shoul-

der belt in the child’s seating position fits close

to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat

belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat

should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

properly positioned across the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the

hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca-

nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once

the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no

longer on or near the face and neck, use the

shoulder belt without the booster seat.

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear facing child restraint. Because a rear

facing child restraint is not suitable for use in this

vehicle, infants should not be transported in it.

Small children

Never let a child stand or kneel on

any seat and do not allow a child in

the cargo areas while the vehicle is

moving. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in an accident or

sudden stop.

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint (except Roadster models).

Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for mini-

mum and maximum weight and height recom-

mendations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that comply

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental

front impact air bag system for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in

this section. The passenger seat is not suitable

for use with a rear facing child restraint needed

for infants. Therefore, infants should not be

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

possible around the hips, not the waist. Place

the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over

your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

belt and receive serious internal inju-

ries.

For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

SSS0292A

WARNING

Fastening the seat belts

Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until it

clicks.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion will permit the belt to

move, and allow you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its

fully retracted position, firmly pull the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. For additional information, see “Child

restraints” later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should be

used only for child restraint installation.

During normal seat belt use by a passen-

ger, the locking mode should not be acti-

vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-

fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0290A

SSS0326

belt and release it. Then smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

Checking seat belt operation

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock

belt movement using two separate methods:

when the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

The front passenger seat belt has a locking

mechanism for child restraint installation. It is

referred to as the automatic locking mode.

when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

You can check their operation as follows:

grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly for-

When the locking mechanism is activated the

seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

ward. The retractor should lock and restrict

further belt movement.

dealer for assistance if the extender is required.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about belt operation,

see a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

Persons who can use the standard

seat belt should not use an extender.

Such unnecessary use could result in

serious personal injury in the event

of an accident.

SSS0588

Shoulder belt arm

Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured in a

collision or a sudden stop.

The shoulder belt arm should be adjusted to the

position best for you. (See “Precautions on seat

belt usage” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull the shoulder belt arm. Pulling the

arm forward will allow an easy access to the belt.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth

and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD RESTRAINTS

the seat belts to retract until they are com-

pletely dry.

the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult

and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not

put the same seat belt around both

your child and yourself.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of

the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide

with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire belt assembly

should be replaced.

SSS0099

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Children should always be placed in

an appropriate child restraint while

riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a

child restraint can result in serious

injury or death.

Children should never be carried on

your lap. It is not possible for even

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

ing any child restraint, keep the following points

in mind:

Never let children who require the

use of a front facing child restraint

ride in Roadster models.

choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

An improperly installed child re-

straint could lead to serious injury or

death in an accident.

check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

if the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be sure

the child restraint is compatible with your

child. Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

CAUTION

For Roadster models, when installing a

booster seat, be sure to turn off the

automatic passenger seatback tilt func-

tion with the seatback tilt cancel switch

(located on the back of the passenger

seatback). Otherwise, the booster seat

may be damaged. See “Tilting and re-

clining passenger’s seat from driver’s

seat” earlier in this section for detailed

information.

SSS0100

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating supplemental air bag

could seriously injure or kill your

child.

The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a

rear facing child restraint for infants. Therefore,

infants should not be transported in this vehicle.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces re-

quire that infants and small children be

restrained in approved child restraints at

all times while the vehicle is being oper-

ated.

Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear facing child restraint

ride in this vehicle.

In general, child restraints are designed to be

installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder

seat belt.

Roadster models do not have an an-

chor for a top tether strap required

for most front facing child restraints.

Child restraints for children of various sizes are

offered by several manufacturers. When select-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

forward and check to see if the belt

holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

belt as necessary. You may need to

try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

WARNING

Improper use of a child restraint can

increase the risk or severity of injury

for both the child and other occu-

pants of the vehicle.

Follow all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a child

restraint, be sure to select one which

will fit your child and vehicle. It may

not be possible to properly install

some types of child restraints in your

vehicle.

If you install a front facing child re-

straint in the front seat, see “Child

restraint installation on front passen-

ger seat” later in this section.

When your child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with a seat belt

to prevent it from being thrown

around in case of a sudden stop or

accident.

If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

CAUTION

Adjustable seatbacks should be po-

sitioned to fit the child restraint, but

as upright as possible.

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the child

restraint.

After attaching the child restraint,

test it before you place the child in it.

Push it from side to side. Try to tug it

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

The three-point seat belt in your ve-

hicle is equipped with an automatic

locking mode retractor which must

be used when installing a child re-

straint.

Failure to use the retractor’s locking

mode will result in the child restraint

not being properly secured. The re-

straint could tip over or otherwise be

unsecured and cause injury to the

child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0261

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

(Coupe models only)

CAUTION

by the supplemental front air bag in a

crash and could seriously injure or

kill your child.

Turn off the automatic passenger seat-

back tilt function by turning the seat-

back tilt cancel switch to the CANCEL

position. (Roadster models)

If you must install a forward facing

child restraint in the front passenger

seat, move the passenger seat to the

rearmost position. Also, be sure the

front passenger air bag status light is

illuminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion for details.

WARNING

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front pas-

senger seat. Supplemental front air

bags inflate with great force. A rear-

facing child restraint could be struck

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

essary, adjust or remove the head restraint to

obtain the correct child restraint fit. See

“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this

section. If the head restraint is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to install the

head restraint when the child restraint is

removed. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try a different child restraint.

SSS0301D

SSS0360B

Front facing — step 3

Front facing^{Front facing — step 2}

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If you must install a child restraint in the front

seat, follow these steps:

1. Turn the seatback tilt cancel switch to the

CANCEL position. (Roadster models only)

2. Position the child restraint on the front pas-

senger seat. Move the seat to the rear-

most position. Adjust the head restraint to

its highest position (if so equipped). Always

follow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback. If nec-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

SSS0651

SSS0652

SSS0653

Front facing — step 4

Front facing — step 5

Front facing — step 6

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the automatic locking mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to emergency locking

mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your knee

to compress the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in

this section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 8.

SSS0641

SSS0681

Front facing — step 8

Front facing — step 11

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

hold the child restraint near the seat belt path

and use force to push the child restraint from

side to side, and tug it forward to make sure

that it is securely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move

more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the

shoulder belt to further tighten the child

restraint. If you are unable to properly secure

the restraint, try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

11. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

The front passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not

illuminated, see “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section. Try a differ-

ent child restraint. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking

mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

9. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt

out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more belt webbing out of the retractor, the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

WARNING

Child restraint anchor point is designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstance is it to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

SSS0207

SPA1644

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

Anchor point location

RESTRAINT (Coupe models only)

The anchor point k is located on the luggage

area floor.

An anchor for a child restraint with a top tether is

provided in this vehicle.

A flap is provided in the carpet for easy access

and is marked with the label shown.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it

must be secured to the provided anchor point.

Secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Guide the top tether strap under the head

restraint as illustrated, and secure it to the

anchor bracket. Tighten the strap according to

manufacturer instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the pas-

senger seat, consult a NISSAN dealer for

details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

BOOSTER SEATS

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER

SEATS

could lead to serious injury or death

in an accident.

WARNING

Children should always be placed in

an appropriate child restraint while

riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a

child restraint or booster seat can

result in serious injury or death.

Children should never be carried on

your lap. It is not possible for even

the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult

and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not

put the same seat belt around both

your child and yourself.

LRS0455

WARNING

Do not use towels, books, pillows or

other items in place of a booster seat.

Items such as these may move during

normal driving or a collision and result

in serious injury or death. Booster seats

A booster seat must only be installed

lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a

three-point type seat belt with

seating position that has

are designed to be used with

lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-

signed to properly route the lap and

shoulder portions of the seat belt over

the strongest portions of a child’s body

booster seat can result in a serious

injury in sudden stop or collision.

An improperly installed booster seat

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

WARNING

Improper use of a booster seat can

increase the risk or severity of injury

for both the child and other occu-

pants of the vehicle.

Follow all of the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a booster

seat, be sure to select one which will

fit your child and vehicle. It may not

be possible to properly install some

types of booster seats in your ve-

hicle.

SSS0363

LRS0454

Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

to provide the maximum protection dur-

ing a collision.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

low back booster seat

is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

If the booster seat and seat belt are

not used properly, the risk of a child

being injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop greatly increases.

high back booster seat

should be used.

If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be sure

the booster seat is compatible with your

child. Always follow all recommended proce-

dures.

Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

Adjustable seatbacks should be po-

sitioned to fit the booster seat, but as

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

upright as possible.

before placing your child in the booster

seat.

After placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt,

make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the abdomen.

Do not put the shoulder belt behind

the child or under the child’s arm. If

you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, see “Booster seat instal-

lation on front passenger seat” later

in this section.

LRS0454

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

When your booster seat is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to

prevent it from being thrown around

in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto-

matic locking mode when using

booster seat with the seat belts.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

front passenger seat:

If you must install a booster seat in the

front passenger seat, move the passenger

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

seat to the rearmost position.

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt

routing.

1. Turn the seatback tilt cancel switch to the

CANCEL position. (Roadster models only)

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown

in the “Three-point type seat belt with retrac-

tor” earlier in this section.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the driver and passenger front impact supple-

mental air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System), front seat side-impact supplemental air

bags, curtain side-impact air bags and front seat

pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

NISSAN advanced air bag system can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest

of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system

(if so equipped): This system can help cushion

the impact force to the chest area of the driver

and front passenger in certain side impact colli-

sions. The front seat side-impact supplemental

air bags are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

system (if so equipped for Coupe models):

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in certain side impact

collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are

designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle

is impacted.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to the

ON position. The front passenger air bag

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the

vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary,

adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain

the correct booster seat fit. See “Head re-

straint adjustment” earlier in this section. If

the head restraint is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to install the head

restraint when the booster seat is removed. If

the seating position does not have an adjust-

able head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper booster seat fit, try a different

booster seat.

status light

may or may not illuminate

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat used. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” later in this

section.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be

sure the shoulder belt is positioned across

the top, middle portion of the child’s shoul-

der. Be sure to follow the booster seat manu-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The supplemental restraint system is designed

to supplement the crash protection provided

by the driver and passenger seat belts and is

not a substitute for them. Seat belts should

always be correctly worn and the occupant

seated a suitable distance away from the steer-

ing wheel, instrument panel, door finishers and

side roof rails. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions on seat

belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ONor

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SSS0131

light is lit or if the front passenger

seat is unoccupied. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” later

in this section.

WARNING

The supplemental front air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a

side impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity frontal collision. Al-

ways wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury in

various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental

front air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The front air bags

inflate with great force. Even with the

NISSAN advanced air bag system, if

you are unrestrained, leaning for-

ward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

tion in any way, you are at greater

risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal in-

juries from the supplemental front air

bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat

belts.

erly seated and wearing the seat belt

can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident. See “Front Pas-

senger air bag and status light” later

in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when

the supplemental front air bag in-

flates.

The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The advanced air bag sys-

tem monitors the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage then inflates

the air bags. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (pattern sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be prop-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0132

SSS0016

SSS0006

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

SSS0007

SSS0009

SSS0100

WARNING

Never let an infant who requires the

use of a rear facing child restraint

ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to

hold a child in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the previous illus-

trations.

Roadster models do not have an an-

chor for a top tether strap required

SSS0008

SSS0099

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

for most front facing child restraints.

Never let children who require the

use of a front facing child restraint

ride in Roadster models.

Children may be severely injured or

killed when the supplemental front

air bags or side air bags or curtain

side-impact air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating supplemental front air

bag could seriously injure or kill your

child. See “Child restraints” earlier in

this section for details.

SSS0159

SSS0101

The seat belts, the supplemental side

air bags and curtain side-impact air

bags are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat. The side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback of

the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in

the front seat to extend their hand

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag (if so equipped):

The supplemental side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily

will not inflate in the event of a fron-

tal impact, rear impact, rollover or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

SSS0162

out of the window or lean against the

door. Some examples of dangerous

riding positions are shown in the pre-

vious illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

supplemental side air bag inflation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Diagnosis sensor unit

8. Satellite sensors

9. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

NISSAN advanced air bag system

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-

vanced air bag system for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located

in the center of the steering wheel. The front

passenger supplemental front air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel. The supple-

mental front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher severity

frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain

frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is

not always an indication of proper supplemental

air bag system operation.

SSS0680

1. Crash zone sensor

4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor)

2. Supplemental front air bag modules

5. Occupant classification system control unit

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual

stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-

tion from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis

sensor unit, seat belt buckle sensors and the

3. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

modules (if so equipped for Coupe models)

6. Supplemental side air bag modules (if so

equipped)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor).

Inflator operation is based on the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classification

sensor is also monitored. Based on information

from the sensors, only one front air bag may

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash sever-

ity and whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned OFF under

some conditions, depending on the information

provided by the occupant classification sensor. If

the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passen-

ger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the

seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-

nated, but the air bag will be off.). See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in this

section for further details. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper performance

of the system.

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use

of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the head and chest of the front occupants. They

can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating front air bag may cause

facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and

passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the front occu-

pants. Because of this, the force of the front air

bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag

module during inflation.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If

you are considering modifications of your vehicle

due to a disability, you may also contact NIS-

SAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

The air bag will deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats,

seat belts and child restraints can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is

designed to detect an occupant and objects on

the seat. For example, if a child is in the front

passenger seat, the advanced air bag system is

designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations

is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor

can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

located on the overhead console. The light op-

erates as follows:

Unoccupied passenger seat: The

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

SSS0681

Front passenger air bag status light

Passenger seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

Front passenger air bag and status

light

section: The

illuminates to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is OFF and will

not inflate in a crash.

WARNING

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to

Occupied passenger seat and the passenger

meets the conditions outlined in this section:

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

The

is OFF to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is op-

erated under some conditions as described

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the seat belt and

supplemental air bag.

passenger seat is unoccupied.

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. However, if the

seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status

light will remain off.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

The occupant classification sensor is designed

to operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child re-

straints as required by the regulations. Failing to

properly secure child restrains and to use the

automatic locking mode (child restraint mode)

may allow the restraint to tip or move in an

accident or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in

this section for proper use and installation.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light

, located in the meter and gauges

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used. If the

air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating

that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could

be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. Make sure that the child restraint

is installed properly, the seat belt is used prop-

erly and the occupant is positioned properly. If

the air bag status light is still not illuminated, try

a different child restraint.

area, will blink. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occu-

pants are seated and restrained properly.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, do not transport

a child in this vehicle.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Other supplemental front air bag

precautions

classification sensor. This can also

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious personal

injury.

wheel and the instrument panel as-

sembly by placing material over the

steering wheel pad and above the

instrument panel or by installing ad-

ditional trim material around the air

bag system.

WARNING

Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause in-

jury if the supplemental front air bag

inflates.

Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material on the seat cushion or by

installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, on the seat that

are not specifically designed to as-

sure proper air bag operation. Addi-

tionally, do not stow any objects un-

der the front passenger seat or the

seat cushion and seatback. Such ob-

jects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion sensor.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system.

This is to prevent accidental inflation

of the supplemental air bag or dam-

age to the supplemental air bag sys-

tem.

Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not place

heavy objects on the seat that will

leave permanent impressions in the

seat. Such objects can damage the

seat or occupant classification sen-

sor (pattern sensor). This can affect

the operation of the air bag system

and result in serious personal injury.

Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the supplemental front

air bag system.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the supplemental front air bag sys-

Tampering with the supplemental

front air bag system may result in

serious personal injury. Tampering

includes changes to the steering

Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This

can damage the seat or occupant

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

occupants. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual still

apply and must be followed. The supplemen-

tal side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags

are designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces

in another type of collision are similar to those of

a higher severity side impact. They are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted. They may not inflate in certain side

collisions.

tem. Tampering with the seat belt

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

Work on and around the supplemen-

tal front air bag system should be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Installa-

tion of electrical equipment should

also be done by a NISSAN dealer.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring should not be modified

or disconnected. Unauthorized elec-

trical test equipment and probing de-

vices should not be used on the air

bag system.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

SSS0209A

When the supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag system (if so

equipped)

A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

This section includes the information about both

the supplemental side air bag system k and the

supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system

k. Curtain side-impact air bags are not avail-

The SRS wiring harness connectors

are yellow and orange for easy iden-

tification.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use

of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-

impact air bags help to cushion the impact force

to the head of occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

able on Roadster models.

The supplemental side air bags are located in

the outside of the seatback of the front seats.

The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags

are located in the side roof rails. These systems

are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to

help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the appro-

priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-

impact air bags do not provide restraint to the

lower body.

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation of

the supplemental side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag system.

WARNING

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the supplemental side air

bag, and seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side air

bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate

quickly in order to help protect the front occu-

pants. Because of this, the force of the side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against these air bag modules

during inflation. The side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag will deflate quickly after the

collision is over.

Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if the side air bag

inflates.

Tampering with the supplemental

side air bag system may result in

serious personal injury. For example,

do not change the front seats by

placing material near the seatback or

by installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, around the side

air bag.

Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag

system components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag sys-

tem should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical

equipment should also be done by a

NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing de-

vices should not be used on the side

air bag system.

The supplemental side air bags and curtain

side-impact air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ONor START po-

sition.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag system. This is to pre-

vent accidental inflation of the side

air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag or damage to the side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag sys-

tem.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

systems are operational.

The SRS wiring harnesses are cov-

Do not make unauthorized changes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

activates in conjunction with the front supple-

mental air bag systems. Working with the seat

belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when

the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of

collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

ered with yellow insulation either just

before the harness connectors or

over the complete harness for easy

identification.

made to any components or wiring of

the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

This is to prevent accidental activa-

tion of the pre-tensioner seat belt or

damage to the pre-tensioner seat

belt operation. Tampering with the

pre-tensioner seat belt system may

result in serious personal injury.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s

retractor. These seat belts are used the same as

conventional seat belts.

Work around and on the pre-

tensioner system should be done by

a NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be done

by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the

pre-tensioner seat belt system.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,

smoke is released and a loud noise may be

heard. The smoke is not harmful and does not

indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale

it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system

WARNING

The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be

reused after activation. It must be

replaced together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner

seat belt system, the supplemental air bag warn-

If you need to dispose of the pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con-

tact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-

tensioner disposal procedures are

set forth in the appropriate NISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal

injury.

ing light

will not come on, will flash inter-

mittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain

on after the ignition key has been turned to the

ON or START position. In this case, the pre-

tensioner seat belt may not function properly.

They must be checked and repaired. Take your

vehicle to a NISSAN dealer.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but the pre-tensioner

is not activated, be sure to have the

pre-tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced by

dealer.

NISSAN

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat

belt system and guide the buyer to the appro-

priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

No unauthorized changes should be

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0206

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag

system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the

illustration.

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the supplemental front air bag,

supplemental side air bag (if so equipped) and

curtain side-impact air bag (if so equipped for

Coupe models) systems, and pre-tensioner seat

belt. The circuits monitored by the air bag warn-

ing light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash

zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag

modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-

impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belt

and all related wiring.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

supplemental front air bag, supplemen-

tal side air bag, curtain side-impact air

bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat

belt systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

Once a supplemental front air bag,

supplemental side air bag or curtain

side-impact air bag has inflated, the

air bag module will not function

again and must be replaced. Addi-

tionally, if any of the supplemental

front air bags inflate, the activated

pre-tensioner seat belts must also be

replaced. The air bag module and

pre-tensioner seat belt system

should be replaced by a NISSAN

dealer. The air bag module and pre-

tensioner seat belt system cannot be

repaired.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems,

and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing:

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental

side air bags (if so equipped), curtain side-

impact air bags (if so equipped for Coupe

models) and pre-tensioner seat belt are de-

signed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a

reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemen-

tal air bag warning light will remain illuminated

after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-

ment of these systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental front

air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain

side-impact air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat

belt may not operate properly. They must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to a

NISSAN dealer.

The supplemental front air bag and

side air bag, curtain side-impact air

bag systems and pre-tensioner seat

belt system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage

to the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, side air

bags, curtain side-impact air bags, related parts

and pre-tensioner seat belt should be pointed

out to the person conducting the maintenance.

The ignition key should always be in the LOCK

position when working under the hood or inside

the vehicle.

WARNING

If you need to dispose of these

supplemental systems or scrap the

vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Correct disposal procedures are set

forth in the appropriate NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-

cedures could cause personal injury.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ................................................................... 2-2

Meters and gauges .............................................................. 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ........................................ 2-4

Tachometer ....................................................................... 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............................ 2-6

Fuel gauge ........................................................................ 2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ........................................... 2-7

Volt meter ......................................................................... 2-8

Trip computer .................................................................. 2-8

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........ 2-12

Checking bulbs ............................................................. 2-12

Warning lights ............................................................... 2-12

Indicator lights ............................................................... 2-16

Audible reminders ........................................................ 2-18

Security systems ................................................................ 2-19

Vehicle security system .............................................. 2-19

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...................... 2-20

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........................... 2-22

Rear window wiper and washer switch

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ........ 2-26

Turn signal switch ........................................................ 2-27

Instrument brightness control ................................... 2-27

Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................... 2-28

Horn ....................................................................................... 2-28

Heated seats (if so equipped) ........................................ 2-29

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 2-30

Traction control system (TCS) off switch

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 2-30

Clock ..................................................................................... 2-31

Adjusting the time ........................................................ 2-31

Power outlet ........................................................................ 2-32

Storage ................................................................................. 2-33

Instrument pocket (except for navigation system

equipped models) ........................................................ 2-33

Sunglasses holder (Coupe models) ........................ 2-34

Cargo net......................................................................... 2-34

Cup holders ................................................................... 2-35

Console box .................................................................. 2-36

Rear floor box ................................................................ 2-36

Rear parcel box ............................................................ 2-37

Stowing golf bags......................................................... 2-37

Coat hook (Coupe models).............................................. 2-39

(Coupe models) .................................................................. 2-23

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch .... 2-24

Headlight and turn signal switch ................................... 2-25

Xenon headlights .......................................................... 2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Headlight switch ........................................................... 2-25

Windows .............................................................................. 2-39

Power windows ............................................................ 2-39

Automatic adjusting function ...................................... 2-41

Interior lights ........................................................................ 2-41

Room light ...................................................................... 2-41

Map lights ...................................................................... 2-41

Vanity mirror light ............................................................... 2-42

Luggage compartment light (Coupe models) ............. 2-42

Trunk light (Roadster models).......................................... 2-43

HomeLink universal transceiver (if so equipped) .... 2-43

Programming HomeLink ........................................... 2-44

Programming HomeLink for Canadian

customers ....................................................................... 2-45

Operating the HomeLink universal transceiver.... 2-45

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............................... 2-45

Clearing the programmed information .................... 2-46

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button ........ 2-46

If your vehicle is stolen ............................................... 2-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

11. Side ventilator

12. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster

models)

13. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) OFF switch

or TCS (Traction control system) OFF

switch

14. Fuel-filler door opener switch

15. Hood lock release handle

16. Fuse box

17. Tilting steering wheel lock lever

18. Ignition switch/steering lock

19. Navigation system display* or Instrument

pocket

20. Audio system/Clock

21. Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch

22. Hazard warning flasher switch

23. Cup holder

24. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

25. Heater/air conditioner control

26. Power outlet

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SIC3266

1. Headlight/turn signal switch

2. Instrument brightness control switch

6. Cruise control main/set switch

(if so equipped)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so

7. Trip computer mode/setting switch

8. Wiper/washer switch

9. Center ventilator

equipped)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn

5. Meters/gauges

10. Passenger supplemental air bag

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-2 Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES

8. Automatic transmission position indicator or

Manual transmission shift up indicator

(See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

9. Reset knobfor trip odometer

10. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)

11. Trip computer setting switch

(See “Trip computer” later in this section.)

12. Trip computer mode switch

(See “Trip computer” later in this section.)

SIC2233

Combination meter:

5. Instrument brightness control switch

(See “Headlight and turn signal switch” later

in this section.)

1. Warning/Indicator lights

2. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

3. Tachometer

6. Fuel gauge

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Speedometer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-3

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

SIC1948

SIC1949A

Triple meter:

Speedometer

Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Reset knobfor trip odometer

1. Trip computer

2. Engine oil pressure gauge

3. Volt meter

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Changing the display:

serious engine damage.

Pushing the reset knobchanges the display as

follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset knobfor more than 1 second

resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC1950A

Tachometer

Transmission indicator

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into

the red zone k.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating

the engine in the red zone may cause

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease temperature. If the gauge is

over the normal range, stop the vehicle

as soon as safely possible. If the engine

is overheated, continued operation of

the vehicle may seriously damage the

engine. See “If your vehicle overheats”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section

for immediate action required.

SIC2371A

SIC2556

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in

the tank.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range k when the gauge needle points

The gauge needle is designed to move to the E

(Empty) position when the ignition key is turned

to the OFF position.

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will vary with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters the E (Empty) position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-6 Instruments and controls

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

gauge reaches the E position. There will be

a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the

fuel gauge needle reaches the E position.

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon

as possible. After a few driving trips,

SIC1954A

SIC1953A

Type A

Type B

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

the

lamp should turn off. If the

CAUTION

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-

tem oil pressure while the engine is running.

When the engine speed is high, the engine oil

pressure is also high. When it is low, the gauge

indicates the low oil pressure.

lamp remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

This gauge is not designed to indi-

cate low engine oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.)

For additional information, see “Mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in

this section.

If the gauge needle does not move

with the proper amount of engine oil,

have the vehicle checked by

NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-7

operation in such a condition could

cause serious damage to the engine.

SIC1955

SIC2234

VOLT METER

TRIP COMPUTER

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the volt meter indicates the battery

voltage; while the engine is running, it indicates

the alternator voltage of 11 - 15 volts (normal

The display of the trip computer is situated in the

triple meter. When the ignition switch is turned

to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the

trip computer and then shows the mode chosen

before the ignition switch is turned OFF.

range k). However, while cranking the engine,

the volts drop below the normal range.

If the needle is not in the normal range k while

the engine is running, it may indicate that the

charging system is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-8 Instruments and controls

consumption and speed → Elapsed time and

trip odometer → Stopwatch → Tire pressure

indicator (PSI) → Up-shift indicator setting (for

M/T models) → Speed indicator

front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected

by road or engine heat, wind directions and

other driving conditions. The display may differ

from the actual ambient temperature or the

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

Speed indicator (mph or km/h)

The vehicle speed is displayed in MPH or km/h

while driving.

Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in

the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The speed indicator in the trip computer

indicates the reference speed. The actual

speed indicated by the speedometer (com-

bination meter) may differ from the one in

the trip computer.

SIC2997

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

Outside air temperature

(ICY — °F or °C)

Switches for the trip computer are located on

the side of the combination meter panel. To

operate the trip computer, push the side of the

switches as shown above.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode

is automatically selected and the digits blink in

order to draw the driver’s attention. Press the

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or

°C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30 to 55°C).

mode switch k if you wish to return to the mode

The outside air temperature mode includes a low

temperature warning feature: below 37°F (3°C),

the outside air temperature mode is automati-

cally selected and the ICY indicator will illumi-

nate in order to draw the driver’s attention. Push

k: Trip computer mode switch

that was selected before the warning occurred.

The dte indicator will remain blinking until the

vehicle is refuelled.

k: Trip computer setting switch

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes

of the trip computer can be selected by pushing

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to (----).

the mode switch k if you wish to return to the

the trip computer mode switch k.

mode that was selected before the warning

occurred. The ICY indicator will continue blink-

ing as long as the temperature remains below

39°F (4°C).

Each time the mode switch k is pushed, the

NOTE:

display will change as follows:

If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

Speed indicator → Outside air temperature

(ICY) → Distance to empty (dte) → Average fuel

The ambient temperature sensor is located in

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-9

turned OFF may continue to be dis-

played.

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

(----).

Even if the display is switched to the other mode

while the time is starting, the stopwatch contin-

ues to advance until you stop the time in the

stopwatch mode. When the ignition switch is

turned to the OFF position, the time is reset.

When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Elapsed time (h:m:s) and trip

odometer (mls or km)

Tire pressure indicator (PSI)

Elapsed time:

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l (liter)/100 km) and speed

(av. mph or av. km/h)

The elapsed time mode shows the time since the

last reset. The displayed time can be reset by

The tire pressure indicator shows tire pressure

(0 - 63 psi) of all tires (except the spare tire) by

sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in

each wheel. Push the trip computer setting

pushing the trip computer setting switch k for

more than approximately 1 second. (The trip

odometer is also reset at the same time.)

Fuel consumption:

switch k to change the display to F (front) or R

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer

(rear).

Trip odometer:

The tire pressure sensor will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). If the tire pressure signal cannot be

received correctly, the display shows (----).

The trip odometer mode shows the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven since the last

reset. Resetting is done by pushing the setting

setting switch k for more than approximately 1

second. (The average speed is also reset at the

same time.)

switch k for more than approximately 1 second.

The tire pressure indicator mode includes a low

tire pressure warning feature. If the vehicle is

being driven with low tire pressure, the tire

pressure indicator mode is automatically se-

lected and the PSI indicator will blink in order to

attract the driver’s attention. Push the trip com-

(The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

Stopwatch (h:m:s)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset,

the display shows (----).

You can use the trip computer as a stopwatch.

Each time the trip computer setting switch k is

Speed:

pushed, the stopwatch will be operated as fol-

lows:

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

puter mode switch k if you wish to return to the

mode that was selected before the warning

occurred. The PSI indicator will continue blinking

until the tire pressure of each tire is properly

adjusted.

done by pushing the setting switch k for more

than approximately 1 second. (The average fuel

consumption is also reset at the same time.)

After 100 hours, the time will start from the reset

display again.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-10 Instruments and controls

For additional information, see “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section and “Flat tire” in the “6. In

case of emergency” section.

section for the use of the up-shift indicator.

When the up-shift indicator setting mode is

selected, the rpm indicator blinks and the engine

speed currently set is displayed. (The initial

factory setting is 6,600 rpm.) The figure can be

changed between 2,000 and 8,000 rpm by

Tire pressure shown in the display may rise

or fall while driving depending on the driv-

ing conditions (heat, etc.) and/or the out-

side temperature. This does not indicate a

system malfunction.

pushing trip computer setting switch k. Press-

ing the switch for less than approximately 1

second will add the figure by 100 rpm. If pushing

for more than approximately 1 second, the figure

will increase by 500 rpm.

WARNING

If the battery cable is disconnected, the set

engine speed will be returned to the initial figure

(6,600 rpm).

The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly and

adjust it to the COLD tire pressure

shown in the tire placard.

Display priority

If a low outside air temperature warning,

low dte (distance to empty) range warning

and low tire pressure warning occur simul-

taneously, other display modes switch au-

tomatically to the outside air temperature

display.

Up-shift indicator setting (rpm) (for

manual transmission models)

The up-shift indicator setting mode is used to

set the desired engine speed (rpm) for the

up-shift indicator (situated in the tachometer) to

illuminate. When the engine speed approaches

or reaches the set figure, the up-shift indicator

will flash or illuminate to show the driver the

timing for shifting into a higher gear. See “Driving

the vehicle” in the “5. Starting and driving”

When trip computer mode switch k is

pressed, the display switches to the mode

chosen before the warning display, but the

ICY indicator will continue blinking.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock brake warning light

Low washer fluid warning light

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Slip indicator light

Automatic transmission check warning

light (A/T models)

Brake warning light

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Automatic transmission position indicator

light (A/T models)

Traction control system (TCS) off indica-

tor light (if so equipped)

Cruise main switch indicator light

(if so equipped)

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off indica-

tor light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light

Cruise set switch indicator light

(if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

Soft top indicator light (Roadster models)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Front passenger air bag status light

trical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not

functioning properly. Have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key

to ON without starting the engine. The following

lights will come on:

WARNING LIGHTS

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-

lock function of the brake will cease operation

but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate.

See “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section for further details.

Anti-lock brake

warning light

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off:

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the anti-lock brake warning light will

illuminate and then turn off. This indicates the

anti-lock brake system (ABS) is operational.

If the light comes on while you are driving,

contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-12 Instruments and controls

Anti-lock brake system warning indicator:

Automatic transmission check

WARNING

warning light (A/T models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the automatic transmission check

warning light comes on and then turns off. This

indicates that the automatic transmission system

is operational.

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the anti-lock brake warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the anti-lock brake

system is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer. See

“Anti-lock brake warning light” earlier in this

section.

Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for re-

pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle

towed because driving it could be

dangerous.

If the light comes on while the engine is running

or while driving, it may indicate that the auto-

matic transmission system is not functioning

properly. Have a NISSAN dealer check and

repair the transmission.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate that the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately.

Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or a low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light comes on when the parking brake is

applied.

If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Low brake fluid warning light:

Do not continue driving if the belt is

loose, broken or missing.

The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

Door open warning light

warning system checked by

dealer.

NISSAN

This light comes on when any of the doors

and/or rear hatch are not closed securely while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as

necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-13

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

turned ON. The light will remain on after the 1

minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light

illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

For additional information, see “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-

sure, the warning light will illuminate. The PSI

indicator will also flash in the trip computer

display.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine

oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

WARNING

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning

light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch turned ON, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

sible. Serious vehicle damage could

occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal

injury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

For additional information, see “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section and in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

TPMS malfunction:

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-14 Instruments and controls

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

for precautions on seat belt usage.

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still comes on while driving after

adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may

be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace

it with a spare tire as soon as pos-

sible.

to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light will illu-

minate. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the front and rear.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

Low washer fluid warning light

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air

bag (if so equipped) and curtain side-impact air

bag (if so equipped), and pre-tensioner seat belt

systems need servicing and your vehicle must be

taken to a NISSAN dealer.

This light comes on when the washer fluid is at a

low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See

“Window washer fluid” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

Seat belt warning light

Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

The seat belt warning light and chime remind you

to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will

remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened.

The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For

5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the system does not activate the warn-

ing light for the front passenger.

CAUTION

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the

pre-tensioner seat belt may not function prop-

erly. For additional information, see “Supplemen-

tal restraint system” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-15

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

Cruise main switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

High beam indicator light

(Blue)

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

supplemental front air bag, supplemen-

tal side air bag, curtain side-impact air

bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat

belt systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL)

Cruise set switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the

light blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate the cruise control system is not func-

tioning properly. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also come

on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make

sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US

gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Front passenger air bag status

light

Automatic transmission

position indicator light (A/T

models)

After a few driving trips, the

lamp should

The front passenger air bag status light

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

(

) will be lit and the passenger front air bag

When the ignition key is turned to the ON

position, the indicator in the tachometer shows

the automatic transmission selector lever posi-

tion. See “Driving the vehicle” (automatic trans-

mission) in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

will be OFF depending on how the front passen-

ger seat is being used.

If this indicator lamp comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when

the engine is not running, it indicates that the

vehicle is not ready for an emission control

system inspection/maintenance test. See

“Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test” in the “9. Technical and consumer informa-

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion, see “NISSAN advanced air bag system” in

the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-16 Instruments and controls

tion” section of this manual.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

system (TCS) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates the traction control system is not op-

erating.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in

one of two ways:

This light also comes on when the ignition key is

turned to the ON position. The light will turn off

if the traction control system (TCS) is opera-

tional.

CAUTION

Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

When the traction control system off indicator

light and slip indicator light come on with the

traction control system turned on, this light alerts

the driver to the fact that the traction control

system’s fail-safe mode is operating, that is the

system may not be functioning properly. Have

the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If a

malfunction occurs in the system, the traction

control function will be canceled but the vehicle

is still driveable. For additional information, see

“Traction control system (TCS)” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

vehicle. The

few driving trips. If the

lamp should turn off after a

lamp does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

Slip indicator light

The light will blink when the vehicle dynamic

control (VDC) system or the traction control

system (TCS) is operating, thus alerting the

driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery

and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

off indicator light (if so

equipped)

This light also comes on when the ignition switch

is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off

if the VDC or TCS is operational.

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic

control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates the vehicle dynamic control system

and traction control system are not operating.

Traction control system (TCS)

off indicator light (if so

equipped)

The malfunction indicator lamp may stop

blinking and come on steady.

This light also comes on when the ignition key is

turned to the ON position. The light will turn off

The light comes on when the traction control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-17

if the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system is

operational.

When the ignition switch is ON.

operation, see “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section.

CAUTION

When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator

light and slip indicator light come on with the

vehicle dynamic control system turned on, this

light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle

dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is op-

erating, that is the system may not be functioning

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

Operate the soft top with the engine

running to prevent a discharged battery.

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

When the soft top is in motion, and any of the

above conditions are discontinued or the pas-

senger power seat switches (on the cushion or

the seatback) are operated, the top will stop

moving. Remove your hand from the operating

switch, and push it again under the above

conditions until the top is fully opened or closed.

The soft top indicator light will turn off when the

top open operation is completely finished. When

closing the top, the light, which is illuminated,

will begin to flash when the top close operation

is completely finished. Securely engage the top

to the vehicle by operating the top latch lever.

The light will turn off.

properly. Have the system checked by

NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in the

system, the vehicle dynamic control system

function will be canceled but the vehicle is still

driveable. For additional information, see “Ve-

hicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The chime will sound if the driver’s side door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition switch

(ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key

and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

Soft top indicator light

(Roadster models)

The chime will sound when the driver’s door is

opened with the headlight switch on unless the

key is in the ignition switch. Make sure to turn the

light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

This light illuminates when the soft top is being

operated or it is stopped before reaching a full

open/close state. When the top is fully opened,

the light will turn off. When the top is fully closed,

the light will flash.

Seat belt warning chime

If the soft top indicator light flashes with the

ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated

or not, and when the top is engaged), it may

indicate the electric soft top control unit is not

functioning properly. Have your vehicle checked

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless

the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The soft top can be moved with the soft top

operating switch only under all of the following

conditions:

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

When the vehicle is stopped.

When the foot brake pedal is depressed.

For more details about the electric soft top

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-18 Instruments and controls

SECURITY SYSTEMS

the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification markers,

and tracking systems, are available at auto sup-

ply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection fea-

tures.

SIC2132

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

Vehicle Security System

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the

doors or rear hatch/trunk lid when the system is

armed. It is not, however, a motion detection

type system that activates when a vehicle is

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-19

3. Close and lock all doors and rear hatch/trunk

lid.

UNLOCK

button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

Lock all doors by using the key or the keyfob.

When using the keyfob, the hazard indicators

flash twice to indicate all doors are locked.

Opening the door without using the key or

keyfob.

Opening the rear hatch or the trunk lid with-

out using the keyfob.

4. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light glows

for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The

system is now activated. If, during this 30

second time period, the door is unlocked by

the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is

turned to ACC or ON, the system will not

activate.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door with

the key, or by pushing the UNLOCK

ton on keyfob. The alarm will not stop if the

ignition key is turned to ACC or ON.

but-

SIC1699A

If the system does not operate as de-

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors and rear hatch/trunk lid

locked and ignition key off. Turn the igni-

tion key to ACC to turn the system off.

Security indicator light

scribed above, have it checked by

NISSAN dealer.

This light k blinks whenever the ignition switch

is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This is

normal.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

Vehicle security system activation

How to arm the vehicle security

system

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

The security system will give the following alarm:

The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

1. Close all windows.

If the engine fails to start using the registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following

procedures:

The system can be activated even if the

windows are open.

The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

a door with the key, or by pushing the

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-20 Instruments and controls

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered

key on a separate key ring to avoid interfer-

ence from other devices.

SIC1699A

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILIZER)

Security indicator light

This light k blinks whenever the ignition switch

is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This

function indicates the security system equipped

on the vehicle is operational.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer

for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

service as soon as possible. Bring all reg-

istered keys that you have when visiting a

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-21

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

NISSAN dealer for service.

Push the lever up

to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to

an accident. Warm the windshield with

the defroster before you wash the wind-

shield.

SIC2998

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

CAUTION

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

k (Slower) or k (Faster).

Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

The intermittent operation speed varies in

accordance with the vehicle speed. (For

example, when the vehicle speed is high, the

intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

Do not fill the window washer reser-

voir tank with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

3 High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-22 Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH (Coupe

models)

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the rear window

and obscure your vision. Warm the rear

window with the defroster before you

wash the rear window.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the window washer reser-

voir tank. Do not use the window

washer reservoir tank to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

CAUTION

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper

may stop moving to protect its motor.

If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to

OFF and remove the snow or ice on

and around the wiper arms. After

about 1 minute, turn the switch ON

again to operate the wiper.

SIC3297

The rear window wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

Push the switch forward

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

Do not fill the window washer reser-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-23

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

voir tank with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

froster.

Do not use the rear window defroster

switch while the soft top is being

operated or fully opened. The heat

may damage the top material and/or

components. (for Roadster models)

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the window washer reser-

voir tank. Do not use the window

washer reservoir tank to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

SIC3000

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors, start the engine and push the

switch on. The indicator light k will come on.

Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the

rear window, be careful not to scratch

or damage the rear window de-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-24 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS

The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off operation.

It is generally desirable not to turn off

the headlights for short intervals (for

example, when the vehicle stops at a

traffic signal). Even when the daytime

running lights are active (Canada only),

the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon headlights

is not reduced.

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to

modify or disassemble. Always have

your xenon headlights replaced at a

NISSAN dealer.

If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start blink-

ing, or the color of the light will become

reddish. If one or more of the above

signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

SIC3291

Xenon headlights provide consider-

ably more light than conventional

headlights. If they are not correctly

aimed, they might temporarily blind

an oncoming driver or the driver

ahead of you and cause a serious

accident. If headlights are not aimed

correctly, immediately take your ve-

hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have

the headlights adjusted correctly.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

1 Turn the switch to the

position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license plate

and instrument lights will come on.

2 Turn the switch to the

position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,

its brightness or color varies slightly. However,

the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-25

turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has

been turned to the OFF position.

CAUTION

After the headlights automatically turn off with

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

the headlight switch in the

po-

sition, the headlights will illuminate again for 5

minutes if the headlight switch is turned to

the OFF position and then turned to the

position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

SIC3315

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the lever

forward. The high beam lights come on and

the high beam indicator light

nates.

illumi-

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam.

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-

duced intensity when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime running

lights operate with the headlight switch in the

Battery saver system

When the headlight switch is in the

OFF position or in the

headlight switch to the

position. Turn the

position for full

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

illumination when driving at night.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-26 Instruments and controls

If the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the daytime running lights do not

illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate

once the parking brake is released. The daytime

running lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system

is active, tail lights on your vehicle are

not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on

your headlights. Failure to do so could

cause an accident injuring yourself and

others.

SIC3316

SIC3001

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

k Turn signal

The instrument brightness control operates

when the light switch is in the or

position and the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

k Lane change signal

To adjust the brightness of instrument panel

lights, press the control switches located on the

left side of the meter panel. Pressing the upper

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

switch k will brighten the lights. The lower

switch k will dim the lights. Repeatedly press-

ing the lower switch will turn the lights off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-27

HORN

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other traf-

fic.

Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher will operate with the ignition switch in

any position.

SIC2475

SIC2195

Push the switch (located on the front part of the

center console) on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Some state or provincial laws may prohibit

the use of the hazard warning flasher

switch while driving.

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air

bag system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

WARNING

If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-28 Instruments and controls

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

the switch to the OFF position 3 .

An optional ventilated net seat has this built-in

heater only in the seat cushion part, not in the

seatback.

When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

SIC3002

The battery could be discharged if

the seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The

switches are located on the center console.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

1 For high heat, push the

of the switch.

(High) side

Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a blan-

ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-

wise, the seat may become over-

heated.

2 For low heat, push the

the switch.

(Low) side of

3 For no heat, the switch has a center OFF

position between low and high.

Do not place anything hard or heavy

The indicator light k in the switch will

illuminate when low or high is selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-29

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so

equipped)

TRACTIONCONTROL SYSTEM

(TCS) OFF SWITCH (if so

equipped)

engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle

dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

SIC1881

SIC1967

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction

Control System (TCS) on for most driving con-

ditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS

reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.

The engine speed will be reduced even if the

accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum

engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the TCS off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system, push the VDC OFF switch (located on

the lower side of the instrument panel). The

indicator light will come on.

To turn off the Traction Control System (TCS),

push the TCS OFF switch (located on the lower

side of the instrument panel). The

indicator

light will come on. Push it again or restart the

engine to turn the system back on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-30 Instruments and controls

CLOCK

See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays time

when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

If the battery cable is disconnected, the

clock will reset its time and the correct

time will not be indicated. Readjust the

time.

SIC3003

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Adjust the time in the following steps:

1. Switch the display to the clock adjusting

mode.

Type A (audio with 1 CD player):

Push and hold the DISP (Clock) button k

until the clock display starts to flash.

Type B (audio with 6 CD changer):

Push and hold the RPT button k until the

clock display starts to flash.

2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button k (

) to adjust the hour. Push the TUNE

button k (

) to adjust the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-31

POWER OUTLET

minute. Pushing the

advance the time and the

will turn back the time.

side will

side

3. Push the DISP button k (Type A), or RPT

k button (Type B) to finish the adjustment.

Resetting

Type A (audio with 1 CD player):

Push the DISP k and TUNE k buttons.

Type B (audio with 6 CD changer):

Push the RPT k and TUNE k buttons.

The time will be set to a time signal.

SIC2258

SIC1968

For example, if these buttons are pushed while

the time is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display

will be reset to 8:00. If pushed while it is

between 8:30 and 8:59, the display will be reset

to 9:00. At the same time the display will return

to the previous audio mode.

Front

Rear

The power outlet is for powering electrical ac-

cessories such as cellular telephones.

rear power outlets. Do not use

double adapters or more than one

accessory with a single power outlet.

CAUTION

Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

The outlet and plug may be hot dur-

ing or immediately after use.

Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

This power outlet is not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter unit.

Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure to turn off the power

switch of electrical accessory being

Do not use accessories that exceed a

combined power draw of 12 volt,

120W (10A) for both the front and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-32 Instruments and controls

STORAGE

used or the ACC power of the vehicle.

Keep the pocket lid closed while driv-

ing to help prevent injury in an acci-

dent or a sudden stop.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

Do not allow water to contact the

outlet. When not in use, be sure to

close the lid.

SIC3004

INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for

navigation system equipped models)

To open the lid, push the knobup 1 .

To close, pull the lid down 2 .

WARNING

The instrument pocket should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-33

CAUTION

Do not use for anything other than

glasses.

Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

SIC2317

SIC3006

SUNGLASSES HOLDER (Coupe

CARGO NET

models)

The net located under the instrument panel

(passenger’s side) can be used to hold small

objects.

The sunglasses holder can be opened by push-

ing the button k.

The net can be removed when necessary.

WARNING

The sunglasses holder should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Do not place sharp objects in the net.

Such objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury when the

vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to prevent an accident.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-34 Instruments and controls

involved in a collision.

The cargo restrained in the net must

not exceed 4 lb (2 kg) or the net may

not stay secured.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

SIC3007

SIC3008

Front

Soft bottle holder

To open the cup holder, slide the lid 1 .

CAUTION

Install the partition plate into the slit 2 .

Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure

people during sudden braking or an

accident.

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid

is hot, it can scald you or your pas-

senger.

Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-35

SIC3009

SIC3010

SIC1975A

If objects (coins, etc.) fall into the rear section of

CONSOLE BOX

REAR FLOOR BOX

the center console box, remove the rear wall k

Pushing the button

will open the lid slightly,

The rear floor box is located behind the passen-

ger’s seat. Fold the seat to use the rear floor box.

of the box as shown, and pick up the objects.

then pull up the lid manually 2 . The center

console box is equipped with a card holder k.

The rear floor box may be opened by pulling the

handle. The rear floor box light illuminates when

the box lid is opened with the headlight switch

ON.

CAUTION

WARNING

Be careful not to pinch your fingers

when removing the rear wall k.

The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

When locking

or unlocking

the rear floor

box, use the master key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-36 Instruments and controls

accident or a sudden stop.

STOWING GOLF BAGS

Follow the instructions here to stow golf bags in

the rear cargo space of your vehicle. Normally

two bags can be stowed in the luggage area

(Coupe models) or one bag in the trunk (Road-

ster models).

However, in some cases you may not be able to

stow the above number of golf bags in your

vehicle, depending on their sizes or types.

SIC2377

SIC1977

The rear floor box has another storage space

under the bottom plate.

REAR PARCEL BOX

Push the upper part of the lid to open the rear

parcel box. For models without the Navigation

system, two boxes are available.

WARNING

Keep rear floor box lid closed while

driving to help prevent injury in an acci-

dent or a sudden stop.

WARNING

The rear parcel box should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Keep rear parcel box lid closed while

driving to help prevent injury in an

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-37

into left side of the luggage area

then put the

bag down 2 .

SIC2196

SIC2237

Coupe models

Roadster models

Normally, one standard golf bag C can be

stowed in the trunk. Insert the top of the golf bag

Normally, two standard golf bags can be stowed

across the strut tower bar in the luggage area as

illustrated (A and B). When stowing a golf bag A

in the rear space, insert the top of the golf bag

into left side of the trunk

then put the bag

down 2 .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-38 Instruments and controls

COAT HOOK (Coupe models)

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before clos-

ing the windows. Use the window

lock switch to prevent unexpected

use of the power windows.

Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls

and become trapped in a window.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

SIC2378

SIC3286

The hooks are located above the side windows

as shown in the illustration.

Driver’s side power window switch

1. Driver side window

2. Passenger side window

3. Window lock button

CAUTION

The power windows operate when the ignition

key is in the ON position and for about 45

seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the

OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door is opened during this period of

about 45 seconds, power to the windows is

canceled.

To open or close the window, push down k or

Do not place items which are more than

2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.

pull up k the switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

The power window switches will be deactivated

during the soft top operation. (Roadster models)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-39

45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the

OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the win-

dow.

SIC3287

SIC3288

Passenger side power window switch

Automatic operation

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, hold the switch down or up.

To fully open or close the window, completely

press or lift the switch and release it; it need not

be held. The window will automatically open or

close all the way. To stop the window, just press

or lift the switch on the opposite side.

Automatic window lowering (Roadster

models)

Locking passenger’s window

When the soft top operating switch is pressed,

the power windows will automatically be low-

ered completely. The windows do not rise auto-

matically after the soft top open/close operation

is completed. Use the power window switches

to raise them.

When the lock button k is pushed in, only the

Auto reverse function

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window as it moves up, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation when

the ignition key is in the ON position or for about

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-40 Instruments and controls

INTERIOR LIGHTS

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING

FUNCTION

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of the front doors. The automatic win-

dow adjusting function will not work,

and the side roof panel/top side rail

may be damaged.

SIC1980A

SIC2238

The power window has an automatic adjusting

function. When the door is being opened, the

window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid

contact between the window and the side roof

panel/top side rail. When the door is closed, the

window is automatically raised slightly.

Coupe models

ROOM LIGHT

Roadster models

The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The interior light has a two-position switch. (k:

The interior light will turn off while the 30 second

timer is activated, when:

DOOR, k: OFF)

When the switch is in the DOOR position, the

light will illuminate when a door is opened.

The driver’s door is locked either with the

keyfob, a key or the power door lock switch.

The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when:

The ignition switch is turned ON.

The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key

or the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed.

MAP LIGHTS

To turn on the light, push the plastic surface k

of the light. Push it again to turn off the light.

The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

When the map light stays on, it will auto-

matically turn off 30 minutes after the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-41

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

(Coupe models)

ignition switch has been turned to the OFF

position. To turn on the light again, turn the

ignition switch to the ONposition.

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light

will go off.

The map and vanity mirror lights will automati-

cally turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation

of the following with the ignition switch in the

ACC or OFF position:

Opening or closing any door

Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or

the power door lock switch

Inserting or removing a key from the ignition

switch

SIC1859

These lights will turn on again when any of the

above operations is performed after the lights

have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn

off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the

above as well.)

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when

the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the vanity mirror light stays on, it will

automatically turn off 30 minutes after the

ignition switch has been turned to the OFF

position. To turn on the light again, turn the

ignition switch to the ONposition.

CAUTION

Turn off the lights when you leave the

vehicle.

Do not use for extended periods of

time with the engine stopped. This

could result in a discharged battery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-42 Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT (Roadster models)

HomeLink UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light

will go off.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

WARNING

Do not use the HomeLink Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by fed-

eral safety standards. (These stan-

dards became effective for opener

models manufactured after April 1,

1982). A garage door opener which

cannot detect an object in the path of

a closing garage door and then auto-

matically stop and reverse, does not

meet current federal safety stan-

dards. Using a garage door opener

without these features increases the

risk of serious injury or death.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and se-

curity systems.

Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink will retain all program-

ming.

Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(for example, new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink ” later in this sec-

tion.

During the programming procedure,

your garage door or security gate will

open or close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

and objects are clear of the garage

door, gate, etc. that you are

programming.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiver to op-

erate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener,

home or office lighting, you need to be at the

same location as the device. Note: Garage door

openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling

code protection”. To program a garage door

opener equipped with “rolling code protection”;

you will need to use a ladder to get up to the

garage door opener motor to be able to access

the training button.

SIC3012

SIC3011

1. To begin, press and hold the

outer

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLink button you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton.

HomeLink buttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light k blinks (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1 - 3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink surface.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLink flashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. When

the indicator light flashes rapidly, both but-

tons may be released. The rapidly flashing

light indicates successful programming. To

activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLink button

releasing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-44 Instruments and controls

when the device begins to activate.

Press and release the HomeLink button up

to three times to complete the training.

NOTE:

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks

rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLink has picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLink to complete the programming

which may require a ladder and another

person for convenience.

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., it is advised to unplug the device

during the “cycling” process to prevent

possible damage to the garage door

opener components.

8. Your HomeLink button should now be pro-

grammed.

To program the remaining HomeLink buttons

for additional door or gate openers, follow steps

2-8 only.

OPERATING THE HomeLink

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

NOTE:

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once

programmed) may now be used to activate the

garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the

appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

6. Press and release the training button located

on the garage door opener’s motor to acti-

vate the “training mode”. This button is usu-

ally located near the antenna wire that hangs

down from the motor. If the wire originates

from under a light lens, you will need to

remove the lens to access the training button.

“clear”

all

previously

programmed

HomeLink buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to

the HomeLink website at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING

TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

NOTE:

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

Once you have pressed and released the

training button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you

have 30 seconds in which to perform step

7. Use the help of a second person for

convenience to assist when performing

this step.

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2

seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter

to HomeLink , continue to press and hold the

HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4

under “Programming HomeLink ”) while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator

light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-

gramming).

replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the HomeLink

surface.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and

releasing the garage door opener program

button, firmly press and release the

HomeLink button you’ve just programmed.

press and hold both the HomeLink and

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-45

position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in

(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink

surface. Hold the transmitter in that position

for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not

programmed within that time, try holding the

transmitter in another position - keeping the

indicator light in view at all times.

away from the HomeLink surface.

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference and (2) This

device must accept any interference that

may be received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light begins to flash rapidly, release both

buttons.

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink

button that was just programmed. This proce-

dure will not affect any other programmed

HomeLink buttons.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to

clear all programming, press and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for

additional information.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4

has been completed.

FCC Notice:

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-

held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127 mm)

This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-46 Instruments and controls

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-47

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-48 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ......................................................................................... 3-2

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys.................. 3-2

Doors ....................................................................................... 3-3

Locking with key ............................................................. 3-3

Locking with inside lock knob..................................... 3-4

Locking with power door lock switch ....................... 3-4

Remote keyless entry system ............................................ 3-5

How to use remote keyless entry system ................ 3-5

Hood ........................................................................................ 3-8

Rear hatch (Coupe models) .............................................. 3-9

Opener operation ........................................................... 3-9

Secondary rear hatch release .................................... 3-10

Trunk lid (Roadster models) ............................................ 3-10

Opener operation ......................................................... 3-10

Interior trunk lid release ............................................... 3-11

Secondary trunk lid release ........................................ 3-12

Soft top (Roadster models).............................................. 3-13

Before operating the top ............................................. 3-13

When operating the top .............................................. 3-15

Opening the top ............................................................ 3-18

Closing the top .............................................................. 3-19

If the top does not open or close electrically ........ 3-19

Care of the soft top and the vehicle body.............. 3-22

Fuel-filler door ..................................................................... 3-23

Opener operation ......................................................... 3-23

Fuel-filler cap ................................................................. 3-23

Steering wheel .................................................................... 3-25

Tilt operation .................................................................. 3-25

Sun visors.............................................................................. 3-25

Mirrors ................................................................................... 3-26

Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-26

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(if so equipped) ............................................................ 3-26

Outside mirrors ............................................................. 3-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEYS

duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.

not given to your dealer at the time of registration

will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

CAUTION

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Immo-

bilizer System key, which contains an

electrical transponder, to come in con-

tact with salt water. This could cause the

system to malfunction.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the rear floor

box lock. To protect belongings when you leave

a key with someone, give them the valet key only.

SPA1379D

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

1. Master keys*

2. Valet key*

Additional or replacement keys:

3. Key number plate

(* With built-in transponder chip)

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as 5 keys can be

used with one vehicle. You should bring all the

registered keys that you have to a NISSAN

dealer for registration. This is because the reg-

istration process will erase the memory of all key

codes previously registered into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registra-

tion process, these components will only recog-

nize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immo-

bilizer System during registration. Any key that is

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, this key can be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS

will unlock the passenger’s door.

WARNING

Opening and closing windows

Turn the driver’s door key towards the front of

the vehicle (UNLOCK position) and hold for

about 1 second, all door windows will begin to

lower.

Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from uninten-

tionally opening the doors, and will

help keep out intruders.

To close all door windows, turn the key to the

LOCK position and hold for about 1 second.

To stop opening or closing, turn the key to the

neutral position.

In the event of a hand in the way, or other

obstruction, the auto reverse function will acti-

vate.

Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

SPA1503A

LOCKING WITH KEY

Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors including the rear hatch/trunk

lid simultaneously.

Turning the driver’s door key to the rear of the

vehicle will lock all doors including the

rear hatch/trunk lid.

Turning the driver’s door key one time to the

front of the vehicle

will unlock the driver’s

door and rear hatch/trunk lid. From that po-

sition, returning the key to neutral (where the

key can only be removed and inserted) and

turning it to the front again within 5 seconds

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

passenger) is moved to the LOCK position

with the key in the ignition and any door open, all

doors will lock and unlock automatically. This

helps to prevent the keys from being accidentally

locked inside the vehicle.

SPA1504A

SPA2320

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

Pushing the door inside lock knobto the LOCK

All doors will be locked when the power door

or UNLOCK

position will lock or unlock

lock switch is pushed to the LOCK position

the corresponding door. (The rear hatch/trunk lid

lock is linked with the driver side door lock.)

with the driver’s or front passenger’s door open.

Then close the door and all doors will be locked.

To individually lock the doors from the outside

(without a key), move the inside lock knobto the

LOCK position. Then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock, push the power door lock switch to

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

the UNLOCK position 2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including

the rear hatch/trunk lid), release the rear

hatch/trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfobfrom outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

The keyfobcan operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The

effective distance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.)

Do not allow the keyfob to become

wet.

Do not drop the keyfob.

Do not strike the keyfob sharply

against another object.

Do not place the keyfob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

SPA1918

The keyfobwill not function when:

1 LOCK button

2 UNLOCK button

3 HATCH/TRUNK button

the battery is discharged,

erasing procedure, please contact

NISSAN dealer.

the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfobis over 33 ft (10 m).

4 PANIC button

The panic alarm and the rear hatch/trunk

lid release will not activate when the key is

in the ignition switch.

For information regarding the replacement of a

battery, see “Keyfob battery replacement” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

CAUTION

1. Remove the ignition key.*1 *2

2. Close all the doors.*3

The following conditions or occurrences

will damage the keyfob.

3. Push the LOCK

button on the keyfob.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

4. All the doors will lock.

The driver’s door and rear hatch/trunk lid

unlock.

Opening the windows

All of the doors will lock when the LOCK

button on the keyfob is pushed even

though a door remains open and/or the

ignition switch is in the ONposition.

Push the UNLOCK

button on the keyfob

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors

are completely closed with the ignition switch

in any position except the ON position.

and the driver’s door will unlock.

Continue to push the UNLOCK

3 seconds. All the door windows will start to be

lowered. Keep pushing the UNLOCK

ton until the windows are fully open.

button for

The interior light turns on and the light timer

activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

in the DOOR position with the ignition switch

in any position except the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

but-

When the LOCK

button is pushed with

To stop lowering the windows, release the UN-

LOCK button. To start lowering the win-

dows again, push the UNLOCK

again for 3 more seconds.

all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes

twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder

that the doors are already locked.

2. Push the UNLOCK

button on the key-

fobagain within 5 seconds.

button

Passenger’s door unlocks.

Releasing the rear hatch/trunk lid

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors

are completely closed.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfobwhile a key is in

the ignition switch. However, the panic

alarm and the rear hatch/trunk lid release will

not activate when the key is in the ignition

switch.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfobwhile the ignition

switch is in the ON position. However, the

hazard indicator and horn will not function.

*3: Doors lock with the keyfobwhile any door is

open. However, the hazard indicator and

horn will not function.

1. Push the HATCH/TRUNK

button on

the keyfobfor longer than 0.5 seconds with

the key removed from the ignition switch.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute of pushing the UNLOCK

button.

2. The rear hatch (Coupe) or trunk lid (Road-

ster) opens.

Any door or rear hatch/trunk lid is opened.

Using the panic alarm

The ignition switch is turned to the ON

position.

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention by

pushing and holding the PANIC

the keyfobfor longer than 0.5 seconds (with

the key removed from the ignition switch).

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition

switch to the ON position or by locking the

doors with the keyfob.

button on

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK

fobonce.

button on the key-

The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay

on for 30 seconds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for 30 seconds, or

The LOCK button or the UNLOCK

button is pushed, or

The

PANIC button

the

HATCH/TRUNK button is pushed on

the keyfobfor longer than 0.5 seconds.

SPA1260

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button

is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

(Switching procedure)

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

Push the LOCK

and UNLOCK

but-

LOCK

cator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button is pushed, the

button is pushed, the hazard indi-

tons on the keyfobsimultaneously for more than

2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other.

hazard indicator flashes once.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica-

tor only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

If hazard indicator and horn mode is not neces-

sary, you can switch to hazard indicator only

mode by following the switching procedure.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica-

tor and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes

In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

HOOD

once and the horn chirps once.

SPA2313

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located

hot immediately after the engine has been

stopped.

below the instrument panel; the hood will

then spring up slightly.

WARNING

2. Raise the lever

at the front of the hood

with your fingertips and raise the hood.

Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot

front edge of the hood.

in the

4. When closing the hood, reset the assist bar

to its original position, then slowly close the

hood and make sure it locks into place.

If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

Hold the coated part k when removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-

tact with the metal parts, as they may be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REAR HATCH (Coupe models)

WARNING

Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK side.

The rear hatch employs a spring component

which enables you to lift up the hatch by one

hand. Because of this, sometimes the rear hatch

may clatter when the lock is released, but it is not

a malfunction.

Do not drive with the rear hatch open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See

“Precautions when starting and driving”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section

for exhaust gas.

To close, push the rear hatch down securely.

The rear hatch release switch is linked with the

driver side door lock. To open the rear hatch,

unlock the driver side door.

SPA1507

OPENER OPERATION

The rear hatch release switch is located be-

tween the license plate lights.

To open the rear hatch, unlock it with one of the

following operations then push the release

switch:

Push the UNLOCK

button on the key-

fobonce. (Pushing the HATCH/TRUNK

button on the keyfob can open the rear

hatch at once without pushing the release

switch.)

Insert the key into the door key cylinder and

turn the door key counterclockwise once.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

TRUNK LID (Roadster models)

WARNING

Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “Precautions when starting and

driving” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section for exhaust gas.

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

trunk closed when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to car keys.

SPA1556

SPA1685

SECONDARY REAR HATCH

RELEASE

OPENER OPERATION

The trunk lid release switch is located between

the license plate lights.

The secondary rear hatch release mechanism

allows opening the rear hatch in the event of

discharged battery or emergency.

To open the trunk lid, unlock it with one of the

following operations then push the release

switch:

The release (string) handle is located under the

strut tower bar inside the luggage compartment.

Push the UNLOCK

button on the key-

To open the rear hatch from the inside,

firmly pull the release handle to the direc-

tion shown above until the lock releases.

fobonce. (Pushing the HATCH/TRUNK

button on the keyfob can open the

trunk lid at once without pushing the release

switch.)

Insert the key into the door key cylinder and

turn it counterclockwise once.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK side. (After locking the doors with a

keyfob, this switch is not available due to the

security system.)

To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

The trunk lid release switch is linked with the

driver side door lock. To open the trunk lid,

unlock the driver side door.

SPA1686

SPA1687

Cancel switch

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

When the cancel switch (located inside the rear

floor box) is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened

with the release switch. It can be opened only by

WARNING

pushing the HATCH/TRUNK

the keyfob.

button on

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the

trunk closed when not in use, and pre-

vent children’s access to car keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

The interior trunk lid release mechanism pro-

vides a means of escape for children and adults

in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

The handle k is located inside the trunk com-

partment as illustrated.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull

the release handle towards you until the

lock releases and push up on the trunk lid.

The release lever is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

SPA1688

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mechanism al-

lows opening the trunk lid in the event of dis-

charged battery or emergency.

Remove the cover

(located inside of the rear

floor box) using a suitable tool

Access the release (string) handle 3 .

as shown.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, firmly

pull the release handle to the direction

shown above until the lock releases.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SOFT TOP (Roadster models)

CAUTION

Always keep the engine running while

operating the soft top. The top will also

operate when the ignition switch is in

the ONposition, but run the engine to

prevent a discharged battery.

Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and

all the warnings and cautions in this section.

Improper operation of the top could cause

a system malfunction, damage, or deterio-

ration of the top material and related parts.

SPA2339

Interior/exterior view

1. Soft top operating switch

BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP

WARNING

2. Soft top indicator light (on the combination

meter)

The soft top of your 350Z Roadster is electrically

operated. You can fully open or close the top

only by pressing the operating switch (on the

lower side of the instrument panel).

Park the vehicle in a safe and level

place and apply the parking brake.

3. Top side rail

4. Top latch lever

5. Soft top

Make sure the area is clear of ob-

stacles and there is enough clear-

ance over the top (for example, in a

garage or a covered area). More than

approximately 6.6 ft (2 m) from the

ground is required to open or close

the top safely. Otherwise, the top

may damage any objects above it

The soft top operating switch must be operated

under all of the following conditions:

When the foot brake pedal is depressed.

When the vehicle is stopped.

6. Top storage lid

7. Trunk lid

When the engine is running.

8. Rear window

9. Rear section of the top

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

while moving. The top operating sys-

tem could also be damaged.

face of the top completely before

opening it.

Do not operate the top in a strong

wind. It could be blown by the wind,

striking someone or damage the top.

Do not open the top when it is wet or

damp. This may cause interior water

damage, stains or mildew on the top

material.

Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the opening while the vehicle is in

motion or while the top is being op-

erated.

Be sure to turn off the rear window

defroster switch. Never turn it on

while the top is being operated or

fully opened. The heat may damage

the top material.

In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle with an open top.

Always use seat belts and proper

child restraints.

SPA1701

CAUTION

Do not place any objects between the

top cloth and the structure. Doing so

could interfere with top operation

and cause damage to the top operat-

ing system or the objects.

CAUTION

Do not operate the top when the

temperature is below 32°F (0°C). This

may result in damage to the top ma-

terial or operating system.

Do not place anything on the top and

the storage lid. Even small items may

interfere with the top operation and

could cause damage to the top or the

Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the top, and dry the sur-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

WHEN OPERATING THE TOP

vehicle body.

In case of low battery or low tempera-

Do not place anything in the top stor-

age area. The top will not fit there

properly, and this could damage the

top and/or the vehicle body.

ture, the top may temporarily stop mov-

ing during the operation. This functions

to protect the top control mechanism,

and it is not a malfunction.

WARNING

Keep hands and other parts of the body

away from moving parts such as the top,

storage lid and power windows.

If the top is opened and closed repeat-

edly in a short period of time, it may

stop moving to protect the top motor.

Wait for a few minutes before operating

the top again.

Do not sit or place excessive weight

on the top and the storage lid, espe-

cially when the top is being operated.

The top may be damaged.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle with the top

partially opened. Always make sure

the top is either fully opened or

closed before driving.

Keep all parts of the top linkage clear of

obstructions, or the top latch may not be

securely locked.

Secure items so that they cannot be

blown from the vehicle while driving

with the top open.

When a child restraint is installed in

the passenger seat, be sure to turn

the seatback tilt cancel switch (lo-

cated on the passenger seatback) to

the CANCEL position, or the child

restraint may be damaged.

Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed before

operating the top.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

3 Rotate the lever forward until the front edge

of the top is completely joined to the vehicle

body.

Top latch lever

The soft top has three locking points to engage

the front edge of the top to the vehicle body.

Operating the top latch lever enables you to lock

or unlock all three locking points at the same

time.

4 Rotate the lever toward you and push it up

into the stored position. Make sure the top is

securely engaged to the vehicle body.

The soft top indicator light will flash with the

ignition switch ON when the top is not en-

gaged. See “Soft top indicator light” later in

this section.

CAUTION

Before opening the top, be sure to

release the top latch. After closing,

securely engage the top to the vehicle

body.

When releasing or engaging the top latch,

you may hear the latch operating. This is

normal and not a malfunction.

To release the latch (before opening the

top):

1 Push the safety switch k .

2 The latch lever k is lowered.

3 Swing the lever forward until the latch is

released.

To engage the latch (after closing the top):

Check that the top is in the fully closed position.

1 Push the safety switch k .

2 The latch lever k is lowered.

SPA1690

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The foot brake pedal is released.

top operation is completed.

The passenger power seat switch (on the

cushion or the seatback) is operated.

This automatic seatback movement will be

stopped:

Remove your hand from the soft top operating

switch, and push the switch again to move the

top to the fully opened or closed position. The

soft top indicator light will turn off when the top

open operation is completely finished. When

closing the top, the light, which is illuminated,

will begin to flash when the top close operation

is completely finished. Securely engage the top

to the vehicle body by operating the top latch

lever. The light will turn off.

When the passenger seat sliding or reclining

switch (on the seat cushion) is operated.

When the power seatback tilt switch (on the

seatback) is operated.

When the seatback tilt cancel switch is

turned to the CANCEL position.

Remove your hand from the soft top operating

switch, and push it again to resume operation.

The passenger seatback will start tilting forward

again from the present position, and the soft top

will start opening or closing. If the top movement

is interrupted at this time, the next time you

resume top operation, the seatback will first tilt

forward from the present position, then the top

will start moving again.

SPA1691

If the soft top indicator light flashes with the

ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated

or not, and when the top is engaged), it may

indicate the top operating system is not func-

tioning properly. Have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Soft top indicator light

The soft top indicator light in the instrument

panel shows the conditions of top operation. The

light illuminates when the soft top is being

operated or if it is stopped before reaching the

fully opened or closed position. When the top is

fully opened, the light will turn off. When the top

is fully closed, the light will flash.

Automatic passenger seatback tilt

function

If you need to cancel this function or when a

child restraint is installed in the passenger seat,

push the seatback tilt cancel switch to the

CANCEL position. For the seatback tilt cancel

switch, see “Tilting and reclining passenger’s

seat from driver’s seat” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restrain sys-

tem” section.

The passenger seatback will automatically tilt

forward when the soft top is operated. This

function is designed to draw your passenger’s

attention to the rear section of the top, which will

come into the passenger compartment from

behind during the top operation. The seatback

will return to the original position when the entire

When the soft top is in motion, and any of the

following conditions occur, the top will stop

moving:

The vehicle is moved.

The ignition switch is turned to OFF.

If the seatback tilt cancel switch is in the CAN-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

CEL position and the passenger seat is occu-

pied, ask the passenger to sit forward when the

top is being opened or closed.

•

The soft top indicator light will illuminate

while the top is in motion. (In about 20

seconds, the opening movement will finish

and the indicator light turns off.)

Automatic window lowering

•

Windows will automatically be fully

opened.

When the soft top operating switch is pressed,

the power windows will automatically be low-

ered completely. The windows do not rise auto-

matically after the top operation is completed.

Use the power window switches to raise them.

The passenger seatback will automatically

move forward, unless the seatback tilt

cancel switch is in the CANCEL position.

It will return to the original position after

the top operation. (See “Automatic pas-

senger seatback tilt function” shown on

the previous page of this section.)

SPA1692

6. Release the switch when the top is fully

opened. (The indicator light turns off.)

OPENING THE TOP

NOTE:

1. Apply the parking brake and move the selec-

tor lever to the P (Park) position (for the

automatic transmission model) or the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position (for the

manual transmission model).

If you release the switch and press it again

while the top is being opened, the top will

slightly move to the closing direction, then

start moving to the opening direction

again. The top is designed to move in this

way. It is not a malfunction.

2. Start the engine.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Release the front edge of the top from the

vehicle body with the top latch lever.

5. Push OPEN on the soft top operating switch

and hold it until the top is fully opened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

seconds, the closing movement will fin-

ish.)

If the top still does not move under the above

conditions or has any system malfunction, see a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. When you

must close the top by yourself, in the event of

emergency or when an immediate dealer service

is not available, close the top manually according

to the procedures shown in this section.

•

Windows will automatically be fully

opened.

The passenger seatback will automatically

move forward, unless the seatback tilt

cancel switch is in the CANCEL position.

It will return to the original position after

the top operation. (See “Automatic pas-

senger seatback tilt function” shown on

the previous page of this section.)

When closing the soft top manually:

Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from

traffic.

Two people should perform this procedure,

as some of the top parts are extremely heavy.

5. Release the switch when the top is fully

closed. (The indicator light, which is illumi-

nated, will begin to flash.)

The top cannot be opened manually.

SPA1693

CLOSING THE TOP

6. Securely engage the front edge of the top to

the vehicle body with the top latch lever. (The

indicator light turns off.)

WARNING

1. Apply the parking brake and move the selec-

tor lever to the P (Park) position (for the

automatic transmission model) or the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position (for the

manual transmission model).

Do not drive with the top partially

opened.

IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR

CLOSE ELECTRICALLY

If the top cannot be operated prop-

erly, see a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible to have your vehicle

checked.

If you cannot operate the soft top with the

operating switch, first check whether all the

following operating conditions are completed:

2. Start the engine.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

foot brake pedal is depressed

vehicle is stopped

4. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating

switch and hold it until the top is fully closed.

•

The soft top indicator light will illuminate

while the top is in motion. (In about 20

ignition switch is ON (Run the engine when

operating the top.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

CAUTION

The storage lid is extremely heavy. Pull-

ing it up should be done by two people.

SPA1694

SPA1695

1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of discharged

battery, you need to open the trunk lid as

follows:

2. Open the top storage lid

a. Remove floorboard inside of the trunk.

b. Remove the harness connector k of the

a. Open the rear floor box behind the passenger

seat.

storage lid motor installed on the back right

side of the trunk by pulling in a downward

direction.

b. Remove the cap k using a suitable tool k.

c. Pull the string handle (secondary trunk lid

c. Pull down the lock release cable (right and

release) k until the trunk lid lock is released.

left) k.

d. Lift up the trunk lid.

d. Listen for a clicking sound of the lock releas-

ing.

e. Pull up the storage lid from the left and right

side of vehicle by hand.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1734

SPA1708

SPA1697

Right side

Left side

3. Close the soft top.

b. A person on each side of the vehicle should

slowly pull the top to the closed position.

5. Lower the rear section of the top.

a. Remove the harness connectors of the top

a. Remove the shock absorber k which sup-

ports the rear section of the top from the

vehicle body. (Both the left and right side

must be removed — the figure above shows

the left side.) To remove the shock absorber,

motor, k (right side of the vehicle) and k

c. Latch the front edge of the top to the vehicle

body with the top latch lever.

(left side).

4. Push the storage lid down to the vehicle body

panel and close it. (Listen for locking sounds

from both right and left sides of the lid.)

CAUTION

remove the holder k on the terminal part

using a flat-bladed screwdriver k .

Two harness connectors are installed on

the right side and three on the left side

as shown. Only the harness connectors

CAUTION

k and k should be removed. (Do not

When the shock absorber is removed,

the rear section of the top loses support

remove the other harness connectors

k, k and k.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

you need to observe all the warnings and cau-

tions shown in the previous pages. Also, to

maintain a good appearance of the soft top and

the vehicle body, you need to care for them by

cleaning and/or washing properly.

The inner surface of the trunk and top storage

lids may show a fibrous, or marbled pattern.

This is the normal appearance of the material

used in these parts.

and falls simultaneously. Support the

top by hand so it does not strike the

body.

b. Lower the rear part of the top and push it

onto the top storage lid. The top is locked to

the storage lid, but the bottom of the rear part

is not closed tightly.

CAUTION

Do not use an automatic car wash or

a high-pressure car wash to clean

your vehicle. The top may be dam-

aged and water may leak into the

inside of the vehicle.

CAUTION

After closing the top manually, have

the system checked and/or repaired

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Store the vehicle with the top closed

if it is not to be used for long periods.

Keeping the top stowed for long pe-

riods may cause wrinkles on the sur-

face of the top.

Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for

long periods or driving at high

speeds. The rear of the top is not

locked completely, and this may al-

low wind and rain to get into your

vehicle.

See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance

and care” section for detailed instructions.

A protective clear tape is applied to the top

storage lid painted surface where the soft top

contacts the surface. When the top is fully

closed, the tape may transmit some light,

visible from the inside of the vehicle. This

does not affect the water and air tightness of

the seal.

CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE

VEHICLE BODY

To use your Roadster safely and comfortably,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

SPA1508

SPA1509A

OPENER OPERATION

FUEL-FILLER CAP

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames

or sparks near the vehicle when refu-

eling.

To open the fuel-filler door, push the opener

switch located below the instrument panel. To

lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

1 To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it counter-

clockwise.

2 Hang the string of the cap on the hook k as

shown while refueling.

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the

cap a third of a turn, and wait for any

“hissing” sound to stop to prevent

fuel from spraying out and possibly

causing personal injury. Then remove

WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

the cap.

when filling.

not turn off after a few driving trips,

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

— Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

have the vehicle inspected by

NISSAN dealer.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts

off automatically. Continued refuel-

ing may cause fuel overflow, result-

ing in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

For additional information, see the

“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in

the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

could also cause the malfunction in-

dicator lamp to come on.

CAUTION

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

properly may cause the

function indicator lamp (MIL) to illu-

minate. If the lamp illuminates

mal-

because the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

lamp should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

lamp does

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

STEERING WHEEL

SUN VISORS

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down

the main sun visor 1 .

2. To block glare from the side, remove the main

sun visor from the center mount and swing it

to the side 2 .

3. To use the extension sun visor

(if so

equipped), pull it out from the main sun visor

as shown.

CAUTION

Do not store the main sun visor before

storing the extension sun visor.

SPA2314

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever down and adjust the steering

wheel up or down to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

SPA2176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

MIRRORS

SPA1792

SPA2143

SPA2157

The night position

will reduce glare from the

INSIDE MIRROR

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

Use the day position

hours.

when driving in daylight

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally changes reflection according to the inten-

sity of the headlight of the following vehicle.

WARNING

When the inside mirror is in the “I” (AUTO)

position 1 , excessive glare from the headlights

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clar-

ity.

of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. The

AUTO indicator light k (green) will be on.

When the switch of the inside mirror is in the

“k” (OFF) position 2 , the inside mirror will

operate normally.

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, see the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

description in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the control knob(located on the driver side

door armrest) to right or left to select the right or

left outside mirror, then adjust using the knob.

SPA1390

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

IC0565

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems

Safety note .............................................................................. 4-2

Control panel buttons — with navigation system.......... 4-2

Names of the components ............................................ 4-2

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button................. 4-3

How to use “BACK” button .......................................... 4-3

Setting up the start-up screen ..................................... 4-3

How to use “INFO” button............................................ 4-3

How to use “SETTING” button.................................... 4-5

Servicing air conditioner .................................................. 4-12

Audio system ....................................................................... 4-12

Radio ............................................................................... 4-12

FM radio reception ...................................................... 4-13

AM radio reception ...................................................... 4-13

Satellite (SAT) radio reception

(if so equipped) ............................................................ 4-13

Audio operation precautions ..................................... 4-13

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player ...... 4-19

FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

changer ........................................................................... 4-23

CD care and cleaning ................................................. 4-29

Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so

How to use the “

” button.................................... 4-8

Ventilators ............................................................................... 4-8

Center ventilators ............................................................ 4-8

Side ventilators ................................................................ 4-8

Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) .......................... 4-9

Automatic operation .................................................... 4-10

Manual operation .......................................................... 4-10

Operating tips ............................................................... 4-11

equipped)......................................................................... 4-29

Antenna ........................................................................... 4-30

Car phone or CB radio .................................................... 4-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAFETY NOTE

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

WARNING

Positioning of the heating or air con-

ditioning controls and display con-

trols should not be done while driv-

ing, in order that full attention may

be given to driving operation.

Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

SAA1289

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1. JOYSTICK and “ENTER” button

2. “INFO” button

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ONor ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

In case you notice any foreign object

in the system hardware, spill liquid

on it, or notice smoke or smell com-

ing from it, stop using the system

immediately and contact a NISSAN

dealer. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

3. “SETTING” button

4. “BACK” button

Reference symbols:

5. “

” brightness control button

“ENTER” button

For Navigation System control buttons (other

than above), refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

This is a button on the control panel.

“Display” key

This is a select key on the screen. By selecting

this key you can proceed to the next function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN

Choose an item on the display using the joystick

and push the ENTER button for operation.

When you turn the ignition key to the ACC

position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is

displayed on the screen. Read the warning and

select the “OK” key then push the “ENTER”

button.

HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTON

This button has two functions.

If you do not push the ENTER button, this

system will not proceed to the next step display.

To return to the previous screen:

When this button is pushed during setup, setup

will be canceled, and the screen will return to the

previous screen.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To finish the set-up:

SAA1290

When this button is pushed after setup is com-

pleted, the settings will be renewed as directed,

and the screen will return to the map.

HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON

When the “INFO” button is pushed, the “Main-

tenance” screen will be displayed.

INFO:

When the “BACK” button must be pushed, (for

example, after the setup is finished) instructions

are given in the operation procedure of each

section in this manual. If the “BACK” button is

pushed when not finished with the setup, the

setting will be canceled, and the screen will

return to the previous screen.

Maintenance information

To set the maintenance interval for the Engine

Oil or Oil Filter, choose an item using the joystick

and push the “ENTER” button.

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set the

engine oil change interval. Use the same steps

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

to set the other maintenance information.

“Maintenance” display cannot be operated

when the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place to see the information.

SAA1291

1. Reset the driving distance to the new main-

tenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance

schedule. To determine the recommended

maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

3. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMA-

TION automatically when the set trip distance

is reached, highlight the “Interval Re-

minder” key with the joystick and push the

“ENTER” button.

4. To return the display to the “Maintenance”

screen, push the “BACK” button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SAA1332

SAA1292

SAA1293

Engine Oil

/Oil Filter

The “Maintenance Notice” screen displays

each time the ignition switch is turned ON until

one of the following conditions are met:

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Maintenance notice

The “Maintenance Notice” screen (“ENGINE

OIL” or “OIL FILTER”) will be automatically

displayed as shown when both of the following

conditions are met:

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

“Reset Distance” is selected.

“Interval Reminder” is set OFF.

the maintenance interval is set again.

The “Settings” screen will appear when the

“SETTING” button is pushed.

the vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition switch is turned OFF.

the ignition switch is turned ON the next time

the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the

“Maintenance Notice” screen is displayed,

push the “BACK” button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

and turn on the “ON” indicator.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast”

key and push the “ENTER” button. Then you can

adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and

the contrast to lower or higher using the joystick.

For information on the “Background Color”

key, refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SAA1294

SAA1091

Display settings

Clock settings

The following display will appear when pushing

the “SETTING” button, selecting the “Clock”

key and pushing the “ENTER” button.

The following menu will appear when pushing

the “SETTING” button, selecting “Display” key

and pushing the “ENTER” button.

On-screen Clock:

Display:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is always

displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

To turn off the screen, select the “Display” key

and push the “ENTER” button to turn off the

“ON” indicator. When any mode button is

pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on

for further operation. The screen will turn off

automatically 5 seconds after the operation is

finished on the map display.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly

because it is always adjusted by the GPS

system.

To turn on the screen, select the “Display” key

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the

24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per

minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time

application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

SAA1295

SAA1296

Display of Select Language

Select the “Select Language” or “Select

Units” key and push the “ENTER” button.

Pacific

Language/Units settings

Mountain

Central

The Language/Units settings screen will appear

when selecting the “Language/Units” key and

pushing the “ENTER” button.

Language: “English” or “Français”

Eastern

Unit: “US” — Mile, °F, MPG

“Metric” — km, °C, L/100 km

Atlantic

Select the “ON” key of the desired language or

units and push the “ENTER” button.

Newfoundland

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

VENTILATORS

HOW TO USE THE “

BUTTON

”

To change the display brightness, push the

” (DAY/NIGHT) button. Pushing the but-

“

ton again will change the display to DAY or

NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness mov-

ing the joystick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if

the “BACK” button is pushed, the display will

return to the previous display.

SAA0600

SAA0601

CENTER VENTILATORS

SIDE VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators by k

opening, k closing or k rotating as illustrated.

Moving the lever up or down will open k or

close k the vents.

To change the air flow direction, turn the dial k.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(Automatic)

the assistance of others in your ve-

hicle. Unattended pets should also

not be left alone.

Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Positioning of the heater or air con-

ditioner controls should not be done

while driving, so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

SAA1297

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

1. Air flow control dial

WARNING

2. Temperature control dial*

NOTE:

* The display of degrees:

“60-75-90” is used for °F (US).

“18-25-32” is used for °C (Canada).

The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

In your vehicle, the air conditioner system

is designed to automatically activate the

cooling function when operating the air

flow control dial, the fan speed control dial

or the air intake button. (The indicator light

on the A/C button will illuminate.) Push the

A/C button off when the cooling function is

not necessary.

3. Fan speed control dial

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in

a closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals. Do not leave children or

adults who would normally require

4. Rear window defroster button

(See the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.)

5. Air intake button

(Air recirculation and Fresh air)

6. A/C (air conditioner) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

need to heat only, use this mode.

windows, turn the fan speed control dial to

the maximum position.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

1. Turn the fan speed control dial and air flow

control dial to the AUTO position. (The air

conditioner will turn on.)

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, turn the air flow control dial to the

AUTO position to return to the auto mode.

This mode may be normally used all year round

as the system automatically works to keep a

constant temperature. Air flow distribution and

fan speed are also controlled automatically.

2. Push the A/C button to turn off the air

conditioner. (The A/C button indicator light

will turn off.)

When the air flow control dial is turned to the

position, the air conditioner

will automatically be turned on at outside

temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to defog

the windshield, and the air recirculation mode

will automatically be turned off.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

1. Turn the fan speed control dial and air flow

control dial to the AUTO position. The air

conditioner will automatically turn on. (The

A/C button indicator light illuminates.)

The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging per-

formance.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Adjust the temperature to about 75°F (24°C)

for normal operation.

The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

Not recommended if windows fog up.

Turn the fan speed control dial

control the fan speed.

to manually

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

Turn the dial to the AUTO position to return to

automatic control of the fan speed.

1. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired

position.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

Air recirculation/Fresh air

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the DEF

position.

Each time the air intake button is pushed, the

indicator light on the button will alternate

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

Heating (AUTO; A/C off)

(Air recirculation) and

(Fresh air).

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

When the indicator light is on, the interior

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

air is recirculated. (When the air recirculation

mode is selected with the A/C indicator off while

the fan speed control dial is in the AUTO

position, the air conditioner will turn on.)

To turn the system off

Turn the fan speed control dial to the OFF

position.

OPERATING TIPS

When the

indicator light is on, the outside

air is drawn into the passenger compartment.

When the engine coolant temperature and out-

side air temperature are low, the air flow from the

foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of

150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction.

After the coolant temperature warms up, the air

flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

When the air intake button is pushed for

longer than 1.5 seconds, both indicator lights

(

and

) will flash twice, and then

the intake air will be controlled automatically.

During this AUTO mode, the indicator light of

the currently selected mode illuminates.

When the air flow control dial is in the

SAA0603

position, the air recirculation

mode does not activate.

Sensor k on the instrument panel helps main-

tain a constant temperature; do not put anything

on or around this sensor.

Air flow control

Turning the air flow control dial selects the air

outlet to:

Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Air flows from defroster and foot out-

lets.

Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed

with the environment in mind. This refrigerant

will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. How-

ever, special charging equipment and lubricant

are required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-

cants will cause severe damage to your air

conditioning system. See “Capacities and rec-

ommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section for air con-

ditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recom-

mendations.

do not indicate any malfunction in your radio

system.

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press

the POWER, FM or AM button to turn on the

radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not

running, the key should be turned to the ACC

position.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal

place to listen to a radio. Because of the move-

ment, reception conditions will constantly

change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and

interference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below are

some of the factors that can affect your radio

reception.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external in-

fluences. Intermittent changes in reception qual-

ity normally are caused by these external

influences.

A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

WARNING

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-

art electronic circuits to enhance radio recep-

tion. These circuits are designed to extend re-

ception range, and to enhance the quality of that

reception.

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equip-

ment.

However there are some general characteristics

of FM, AM and SAT (satellite — if so equipped)

radio signals that can affect radio reception

quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics are

completely normal in a given reception area, and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE (SAT) RADIO

RECEPTION (if so equipped)

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble

response.

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio

may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.

Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite

radio ON for the satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other, result-

ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

No satellite radio reception is available when the

SAT band option is selected unless optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and

an XM^®or SIRIUS^TMsatellite radio service

subscription is active.

SAA0306

AM RADIO RECEPTION

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the FM

station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength

of the FM signal is directly related to the distance

between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals

follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the

same characteristics as light. For example they

will reflect off objects.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and

Hawaii.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact Disc (CD) player

During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

dehumidify or ventilate the player com-

pletely.

CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or

that have pin holes may not work prop-

erly.

The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunction.

3.1 in (8 cm) discs

CDs that are not round

CDs with a paper label

CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

This audio system can only play prere-

corded CDs. CDs with MP3 or WMA

format cannot be written in this audio

system.

SAA0480

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or

packaging.

If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CHECK DISC:

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file

size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:

44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression

removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of

a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t

hear.

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

This is a malfunction due to excessive

temperature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button.

After a short time, reinsert the CD. The

CD can be played when the temperature

of the player returns to normal.

Windows and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks and trademarks of Mi-

crosoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA CD in the audio

system with a CD changer).

Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits

per second used by a digital music file. The

size and quality of a compressed digital audio

file is determined by the bit rate used when

encoding the file.

Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or

WMA (for the audio system with a

6CD changer)

Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is

the rate at which the samples of a signal are

converted from analog to digital (A/D conver-

sion) per second.

Explanation of terms:

MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“ROOT” is displayed.

The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

SAA1025

Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressed files

(MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above.

The names of folders not containing

MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Specification chart:

Supported media

CD, CD-R, CD-RW

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-

ported.

Supported file systems

Version

MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

MP3

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate

Version

8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Supported ver-

sions*1

WMA

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3

only)

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder),

Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Folder levels

Text character number limitation

128 characters

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE

(UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16

Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06:

UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

Displayable character codes*2

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be

played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom

Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the

player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be

played.

Cannot play

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and num-

ber of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of

MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Poor sound quality

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time be-

fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the

music starts playing.

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Music cuts off or skips

Skipping with high bit rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by

when playing. copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order. desired order.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

8. RPT (Repeat) play button

9. CD EJECT button

10. TUNE/FF⋅REW button

11. ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

12. Audio/Clock display

13. Station and preset select button

14. AUDIO button

Audio main operation

ON⋅OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio

or CD) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. When no CD is

loaded, the radio will come on. While the system

is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob

turns the system off.

Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobto adjust

the volume.

SAA1298

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,

BALANCE):

3. DISP (Display) CHANGE button

4. SCAN tuning button

5. CD play button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER

Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting

mode as follows.

1. MUTE button

6. RADIO (FM/AM) band select button

7. MIX play button

BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE

2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

CHANGE button

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance, push

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

the AUDIO button until the desired mode

(BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE) ap-

pears in the display. Push the TUNE

FM-AM radio operation

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

RADIO (FM/AM) band select:

(

) or SEEK (

) button

Pushing the RADIO band select button will

change the band as follows:

to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level.

Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to adjust

Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers

and Balance adjusts the sound between the

right and left speakers.

Push the TUNE button

for manual

tuning. To move quickly through the channels,

push and hold either side of the TUNE button

down for more than 0.5 seconds.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

When RADIO band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

SEEK tuning:

After 10 seconds, the radio or CD display

reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the

desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display appears.

Push the SEEK button

to tune

The last station played will also come on when

the power knobis turned to ON.

from high to low or low to high frequencies and

stops at the next broadcasting station.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

band select button is pushed, the compact disc

will automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will come on.

SCANtuning:

MUTE button:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but-

ton again during this 5 second period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station.

Push the MUTE button to mute the audio sound.

Push the MUTE button again to release the

mute.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically

change from stereo to monaural reception.

DISP DISPLAY CHANGE:

Push the DISP button for more than 1.5 seconds

to adjust the digital clock display. See “Clock” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section for the

clock adjustment operation.

TUNE (Tuning):

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-

tion.

When the DISP button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being

played, the display will show the CD play time.

Station memory operations:

WARNING

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six

for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set

for the AM band.

The radio should not be tuned while

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button.

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

CAUTION

2. Select the desired station and keep pushing

any of the desired station select buttons (1 to

6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio

mutes when the select button is pushed.)

When the

(fast forward) or

(rewind)

Do not force the compact disc into the

slot. This could damage the player.

button is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobwill start the com-

pact disc.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW/

TRACK CHANGE:

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also

be used without an adapter.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse blows, the radio memory will be

erased. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed

while the compact disc is being played, the

program next to the present one will start to play

from its beginning. Push several times to skip

through programs. The compact disc will ad-

vance the number of times the button is pushed.

(When the last program on the compact disc is

skipped through, the first program will be

CD PLAY:

When the CD (CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc will appear on the display.

When the CD button is pushed with the com-

pact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio

will automatically be turned off and the compact

disc will start to play.

played.) When the

(APS REW) button is

pushed, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The compact disc will go

back the number of times the button is pushed.

DISP CD PLAY TIME:

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

Push the DISP button for less than 1.5 seconds

while the compact disc is being played to show

the play time on the display.

SCANtuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the beginning of all the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

tracks of CD will be played for 10 seconds in

sequence.

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning. If the SCAN

tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next CD program.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

MIX MIX play:

When the MIX button is pushed while the com-

pact disc is being played, programs will be

played at random, not following the sequence on

the compact disc. The same program may be

repeated twice. Push the MIX button again to

return to the normal play mode.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it. (except for 3.1 in [8 cm] diam-

eter compact discs)

If the following message appears on the display,

push the EJECT button:

REPEAT (RPT) play:

CHECK DISC — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is damaged or

When the RPT button is pushed while the

compact disc is being played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

inserted upside-down.

CD ERR F * — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is a proper audio

CD. (* shows a different

number according to the au-

dio condition.)

The display shows the following symbol; (no

mark): 1 CD RPT (Repeat)

CD INindicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded.

1: 1 TR (Track) RPT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

8. RPT (Repeat) play/CLOCK button

9. CD EJECT button

10. TUNE/FF⋅REW button

11. ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

12. Audio/Clock display

13. Station and preset (FM/AM/SAT*)/CD in-

sert or CD play select button

14. AUDIO button

* No satellite radio reception is available when

the SAT band option is selected unless op-

tional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled, and an XM^®or SIRIUS^TMsatellite

radio service subscription is active.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing to the XM or SIRI-

US^TMsatellite radio provider. After receiving

the activation signal, an available channel list

will be automatically updated in the radio. For

XM , turn the ignition switch from the LOCK

to ACC position to update the channel list.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and

Hawaii.

SAA1299

3. DISP (Display) CHANGE button

4. SCAN tuning button

5. CD PLAY button

6. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select button

7. PTY (Program type), CAT (Category)* select

button

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

1. CD LOAD button

2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

CHANGE button

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low

frequency range automatically in both radio re-

ception and CD playback.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

This audio system has an active noise compen-

sation feature called “Audio Pilot”. The Audio

Pilot uses a microphone to detect external road

noise and automatically adjusts the amplifier to

compensate for any competing high, midrange,

or low frequency noise.

to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level.

Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to adjust

Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers

and Balance adjusts the sound between the

right and left speakers.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:

Pushing the RADIO band select button will

change the band as follows:

(Without satellite radio)

To change the AUDIOP (Audio Pilot) mode to

OFF or ON, push the TUNE or SEEK button.

ON⋅OFF/Volume control:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

(With satellite radio)

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio

or CD) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. When no CD is

loaded, the radio will come on. While the system

is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob

turns the system off.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → SAT1 → SAT2 → AM

No satellite operation is available during scrolling

of modes, unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed, and an XM or SIRIUS^TM

satellite radio service subscription is active.

CLOCK adjusting:

Push the RPT button for more than 1.5 seconds

to adjust the digital clock display.

When RADIO band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobto adjust

the volume.

When the clock adjusting display is selected, the

time (hour or minute) will start flashing. See

“Clock” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section for the detailed clock adjustment opera-

tion.

AUDIO button:

The last station/channel played will also come on

when the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobis pushed

to ON.

Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting

mode as follows.

BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE →

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

band select button is turned to ON, the compact

disc will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station/channel played will come on.

DISP DISPLAY CHANGE:

AUDIOP

This button will work during satellite radio (if so

equipped) and CD operation. Find the detailed

function in the description of each item.

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance, push

the AUDIO button until the desired mode

(BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE) ap-

pears in the display. Push the TUNE

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically

(

) or SEEK (

) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

change from stereo to monaural reception.

channels of the next or previous category.

1. Tune to the desired station/channel using the

SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

If the satellite radio signal is lost due to interfer-

ence while driving, in a parking structure or

tunnel for example, “NO SIGNAL” will be dis-

played and no satellite radio station will be

available.

SCANtuning:

2. Select the desired station/channel and keep

pushing any of the desired station/channel

and preset buttons (1 to 6) until a beep

sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the

station and preset button is pushed.)

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but-

ton again during this 5 second period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station.

TUNE (Tuning):

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-

tion.

WARNING

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

The radio should not be tuned while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

DISP SAT radio display change (if so

equipped):

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse blows, the radio memory will be

erased. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Pushing the DISP button will display addi-

tional information (for example: Title, Artist

name) about the satellite radio broadcast.

Push the TUNE button

for manual

Radio data system (RDS):

tuning. To move quickly through the channels,

push and hold either side of the TUNE button

down for more than 0.5 seconds.

Pushing the DISP button for more than 1.5

seconds will change the display mode as

follows:

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a

data information service transmitted by some

radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)

and/or SAT encoded within a regular radio

broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in

large cities, but many stations are now consid-

ering broadcasting RDS data.

SEEK tuning:

Channel number → Channel name → Artist

name → Song title → Channel number

(For FM and AM radio)

Push the SEEK button

to tune

Station memory operations:

from high to low or low to high frequencies and

stops at the next broadcasting station.

RDS can display:

Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM

band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and the SAT radio

(6 for SAT1, 6 for SAT2), and 6 stations can be

set for the AM band.

(For satellite radio)

Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

Station name, such as “The Groove”.

Push the SEEK button

to seek

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

Music or programming type such as “Classi-

cal”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

mode will be cancelled.

onds. Tuning to the PTY (CAT) station will

start. If you do not push the SEEK button

within the 10 second period, the PTY (CAT)

mode will be cancelled.

PTY (CAT) name selection can also be

achieved by pushing the preset buttons.

Traffic reports about delays or construction.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Initial PTY (CAT) names are stored in the

preset buttons, but these can be changed by

pushing the preset buttons for more than 1.5

seconds when the desired PTY (CAT) name

is in the display.

3. PTY (CAT) SCANtuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the

PTY (CAT) name station, and stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing

the button again during this 5 second period

will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN

tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Program type (PTY)/Category

(CAT) select:

When PTY button is pushed during FM mode,

the PTY (CAT) name of the current tuned station

is displayed. When the PTY (CAT) button is

pushed during satellite radio mode (if so

equipped), the category name of the current

channel is displayed. During this time if the PTY

data code is zero, or the data is unreadable, the

display will show “NONE”.

Compact disc (CD) changer

operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,

push the LOAD button and insert the compact

disc into the slot with the label side facing up.

The compact disc will be guided automatically

into the slot and start playing.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

PTY (CAT) name selection can be done by

the up/down TUNE button

the PTY (CAT) selection mode.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc will appear on the display.

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name by

one step, with one push of the up/down

TUNE button

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

After selecting a PTY (CAT) name, push the

SEEK button or SCAN button within 10

seconds. Tuning to the PTY (CAT) station will

start. If you do not push the TUNE button

within the 10 second period, the PTY (CAT)

2. PTY (CAT) SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a PTY (CAT) name, push the

SEEK button

within 10 sec-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

When the

button is pushed with the com-

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

pact disc loaded but the tape or the radio

playing, the tape or radio will automatically be

turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

CAUTION

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Do not force the compact disc into

the slot. This could damage the

player.

When the

button is pushed for

DISP CD PLAY INFORMATION:

less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the folders in the compact disc will

change.

When the DISP button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being

played, the play time will be displayed.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

When the

button is pushed for

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobwill start the com-

pact disc.

more than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc

is being played, the compact disc will play while

forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to the

normal play speed.

When the DISP button is pushed for more than

1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the

disc information display will change.

CD:

CD LOAD:

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select

button (1 to 6), then insert the CD.

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed

CD with MP3 or WMA:

while the compact disc is being played, the

program next to the present one will start to play

from its beginning. Push several times to skip

through programs. The compact disc will ad-

vance the number of times the button is pushed.

(When the last program on the compact disc is

skipped through, the first program will be

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succes-

sion, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5

seconds.

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

played.) When the

(APS REW) button is

CD:

CD PLAY:

pushed, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The compact disc will go

back the number of times the button is pushed.

When the

(fast forward) or

(rewind)

When the

(CD play) button is pushed with

button is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

CD PLAY select button:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it.

To change CD, push the CD play select button

(1 to 6).

If either of the following messages appear on the

display, push the EJECT button:

SCANtuning:

PUSH EJECT — Eject the disc, and insert it

again.

The display shows the following symbols.

(no mark): ALL CD RPT (Repeat)

1 DISC: 1 CD RPT

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will

be played for 10 seconds in sequence.

CHECK DISC — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is damaged or

inserted upside-down.

1: 1 TR (Track) RPT or 1 FLDR (Folder) RPT

MIX: ALL CD MIX

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the first program in all the CDs will be

played for 10 seconds.

CD ERR F * — Eject the disc, and check

whether it is a proper audio

CD. (* shows a different

number according to the au-

dio condition.)

1 DISC MIX: 1 CD MIX

1 MIX: 1 FLDR MIX

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning.

CD EJECT:

CD INindicator:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

disc program.

CD IN indicator (inserted slot number 1 - 6)

appears on the display when the CD is loaded.

To eject the discs selected by the CD select

button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5

seconds.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT play button is pushed while the

compact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed.

To eject all the discs in succession, push the

EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.

CD:

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

MODE select switch

Push the MODE select switch to change the

mode.

Without satellite radio:

AM, FM1, FM2 and CD or CD changer

With satellite radio:

AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1, SAT2 and CD changer

VOLUME control switches

Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

SAA0451

SAA1300

Tuning switch

1. VOLUME control switch

2. MODE select switch

3. POWER on/off switch

4. Tuning switch

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Memory change (radio):

Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Push up or down the tuning switch for less than

1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

SEEK tuning (radio):

Push up or down the tuning switch for more than

1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio

station.

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF,

APS REW (CD or CD changer):

POWER on/off switch

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or

ON position, push the POWER on/off switch to

turn the audio system on or off.

A new disc may be rough on its inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges using

the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

Push up or down the tuning switch for less than

1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Push several times to skip back or skip through

programs.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN vehicle, be sure to observe the

following cautions, otherwise the new equip-

ment may adversely affect the Engine Control

system and other electronic parts.

This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank interval

within one program or there is no interval be-

tween programs, the system may not stop in the

desired or expected location.

WARNING

FOLDER change (CD changer/CD with

MP3 or WMA):

A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

Push up or down the tuning switch for more than

1.5 seconds to change the folders (if there are

any folders).

DISC change (CD changer/CD without

MP3 or WMA):

SAA0606

If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

ANTENNA

Push up or down the tuning switch for more than

1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up or

down.

The antenna is located at the rear of the vehicle.

To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise.

To reinstall it, screw it securely into the base.

CAUTION

If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

Be sure to remove the antenna before

entering a low-roof garage or an auto-

matic car wash. Otherwise the antenna

may be damaged.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAUTION

Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the manu-

facturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ............................ 5-2

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................................. 5-2

Three-way catalyst .......................................................... 5-3

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ................. 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ..................................... 5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............................ 5-5

Ignition switch ....................................................................... 5-6

Automatic transmission ................................................. 5-6

Manual transmission ....................................................... 5-7

Key positions ................................................................... 5-7

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.......................... 5-8

Before starting the engine ................................................. 5-8

Starting the engine ............................................................... 5-9

Driving the vehicle ................................................................ 5-9

Automatic transmission ................................................. 5-9

Manual transmission .................................................... 5-13

Parking brake ...................................................................... 5-15

Cruise control (if so equipped) ...................................... 5-16

Precautions on cruise control ................................... 5-16

Cruise control operations ........................................... 5-16

Break-in schedule .............................................................. 5-18

Increasing fuel economy .................................................. 5-18

Parking/parking on hills .................................................... 5-19

Power steering .................................................................... 5-20

Brake system ....................................................................... 5-20

Braking precautions ..................................................... 5-20

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .................................. 5-21

Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped) ........ 5-22

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 5-23

Cold weather driving ......................................................... 5-25

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................................... 5-25

Anti-freeze ...................................................................... 5-25

Battery ............................................................................. 5-25

Draining of coolant water ........................................... 5-25

Tire equipment .............................................................. 5-25

Special winter equipment .......................................... 5-26

Driving on snow or ice ................................................ 5-26

Engine block heater (if so equipped) ..................... 5-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

prevent children’s access to car keys.

(Roadster models)

senger compartment. If you must

drive with the rear hatch/trunk lid

open, follow these precautions:

WARNING

Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

1. Open all the windows.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

2. Set the air recirculation mode OFF

and the fan control at the maxi-

mum position to circulate the air.

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

tain colorless and odorless carbon mon-

oxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous.

It can cause unconsciousness or death.

If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to

trailer

through the seal on the rear

hatch/trunk lid or the body, follow

the manufacturer’s recommendation

to prevent carbon monoxide entry

into the vehicle.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury. (Coupe models)

If a special body, camper, or other

equipment is added for recreational

or other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to prevent

carbon monoxide entry into the ve-

hicle. Some recreational vehicle ap-

pliances such as stoves, refrigera-

tors, heaters, etc. may also generate

carbon monoxide.

Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked with the

trunk closed when not in use, and

Keep the rear hatch/trunk lid closed

while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the pas-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-2 Starting and driving

Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system compo-

nents.

•

The vehicle is raised for service.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

Do not race the engine while warm-

ing it up.

You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

•

You notice a change in the sound

of the exhaust system.

CAUTION

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

You have had an accident involv-

ing damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously

reduce the three-way catalyst’s abil-

ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle

has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire infla-

tion pressure for those tires.)

THREE-WAY CATALYST

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if

noticeable loss of performance or

other unusual operating conditions

are detected. Have the vehicle in-

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the converter are burned at high tem-

peratures to help reduce pollutants.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

WARNING

The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

spected promptly by

dealer.

NISSAN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-3

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

with the actual order of the tire position. See

“Trip computer” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

Additional information

The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure

of the spare tire.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

WARNING

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indica-

tor is illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replacement

or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con-

tinue to function properly.

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and

could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a spare

tire as soon as possible. (See “Flat

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and

the outside temperature. Low outside tem-

perature can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower tire

inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate. If the

warning light illuminates in low ambient tem-

perature, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

You can also check the pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the trip computer.

The order of the tire pressure figures dis-

played on the screen does not correspond

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-4 Starting and driving

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As

with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the “1. Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section and also instruct your passen-

gers to do so.

tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for changing a flat tire.)

signals from the tire pressure sensors,

and the TPMS will not function properly.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

CAUTION

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

WARNING

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.

This may cause poor reception of the

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-5

IGNITION SWITCH

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving af-

ter drinking alcohol increases the likeli-

hood of being involved in an accident

injuring yourself and others. Addition-

ally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON

direction.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the

selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park)

position. The selector lever can be moved if

the ignition switch is in the ONposition

and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. You must

not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every

year thousands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol related accidents. Although the local

laws vary on what is considered to be legally

intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all

people differently and most people underesti-

mate the effects of alcohol.

There is an OFF position

in between the

SSD0392

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is

indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. When the

ignition switch is in the OFF position, the steer-

ing wheel is not locked.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot

be turned to the LOCK position and removed

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-

wise from the straight up position.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over the counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

When removing the key from the ignition switch,

make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park)

position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK

position.

When the key cannot be turned to the LOCK

position, proceed as follows to remove the key:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-6 Starting and driving

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

SSD0503

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while

driving.

KEY POSITIONS

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock

device.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position

from the ACC or ON position, turn the key to the

OFF position, push the key in, then turn the key

to the LOCK position.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed when the

switch is in this position.

There is an OFF position

in between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is

indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-7

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

OFF (1)

ring), restart the engine using the following

procedures:

Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

Maintenance items should be checked peri-

odically, for example, each time you check

engine oil.

The ignition lock is designed so that the key

cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the

selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

Check that all windows and lights are clean.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

Visually inspect tires for their appearance and

condition. Also check tires for proper infla-

tion.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

Lock all doors.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered key

on a separate key ring to avoid interference from

other devices.

Position seat and adjust head restraints.

Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor, starting

the engine.

Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

See “Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-8 Starting and driving

STARTING THE ENGINE

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Apply the parking brake.

way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine

for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank the en-

gine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by turning the ignition key to START.

Release the key when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5-speed automatic transmission

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). (P preferred.)

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled by a transmission con-

trol module to produce maximum power and

smooth operation.

The starter is designed not to operate if the

selector lever is in one of the driving posi-

tions.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum ve-

hicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Manual transmission:

CAUTION

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position,

and depress the clutch pedal to the floor

while cranking the engine.

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, other-

wise the starter could be damaged.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal and push the selector lever button

before shifting the selector lever to the R (Re-

verse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift

mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully

stopped before attempting to shift the selector

lever.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

key to START. Release the key when the

engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the en-

gine while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

This automatic transmission model is de-

signed so that the foot brake pedal must

be depressed before shifting from P (Park)

to any drive position while the ignition

switch is ON.

If the engine is very hard to start in extremely

cold weather or when restarting, depress the

accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3

to the floor) and hold it then crank the engine.

Release the key and the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting

it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a

short period of time may make the vehicle

more difficult to start.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park) position and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is turned

to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

If the engine is very hard to start because it is

flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-9

key is removed from the ignition switch.

Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive)

while vehicle is moving backward.

These could cause an accident.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

push the selector lever button to shift into a

driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

CAUTION

WARNING

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or

manual shift mode. Always depress

the brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an acci-

dent.

SSD0346

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to

R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), or Manual

shift mode position.

On slippery roads, do not downshift.

This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving forward.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected

without pushing the button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-10 Starting and driving

shift mode. Shift range can be selected manu-

ally.

WARNING

CAUTION

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

Use this position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

→

←

→

←

→

←

→

←

_M1

_M2

_M3

_M4

_M5

R (Reverse):

_M5 (5th):

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting R

(Reverse). The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the selector lever button

pushed in to move the selector lever from

P (Park), N(Neutral) or any drive position

to R (Reverse).

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

_M4 (4th):

If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason

while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or

any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned

to LOCK and be removed from the ignition

switch. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.

For driving up or down long slopes where engine

braking would be advantageous.

_M3 (3rd) and _M2 (2nd):

N (Neutral):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on down-

hill grades.

P (Park):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled

engine while the vehicle is moving.

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector

lever button pushed in to move the selec-

tor lever from N(Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, first depress the foot

brake pedal, apply the parking brake, then shift

into the P (Park) position.

_M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than _M4

range. This reduces fuel economy.

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the

manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

When shifting up, move the selector lever to

the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-11

When shifting down, move the selector lever

to the − (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

Fail-safe

When fail-safe operation occurs, the automatic

transmission will be locked in 4th gear.

Moving the selector lever to the same side

twice will shift the ranges in succession.

However, if this motion is rapidly done, the

second shifting may not be completed prop-

erly.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. This will occur

even if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, turn the ignition key

OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the

key back to the ONposition. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating con-

dition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer

check the transmission and repair if neces-

sary.

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

When accelerating again, it is necessary

to shift up to the desired range.

SSD0347

When canceling the manual shift mode, re-

turn the selector lever to the D position. The

transmission returns to the normal driving

mode.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

select lever may not be moved from the P (Park)

position even with the brake pedal depressed.

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving performance

and reduces the chance of vehicle dam-

age or loss of control.

To move the selector lever, depress the brake

pedal, apply the parking brake, and push the

shift lock release button by using a suitable tool

as shown. Push the selector lever button, then

the selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral).

This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery

is discharged.

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into the lower gear, depend-

ing on the vehicle speed.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have

a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmis-

sion system as soon as possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-12 Starting and driving

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,

4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence accord-

ing to the vehicle speed.

Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

To back up, depress the shift lever and then

move it to the R (Reverse) position after stop-

ping the vehicle completely.

Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift to N (Neutral),

then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the

clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1.

When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a

stop light), shift to N(Neutral) and

release the clutch pedal with the foot

brake applied.

WARNING

SSD0536

Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into

the appropriate gear then slowly and smoothly

release the clutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a short throw

shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth

gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal

before operating the shift lever. If the clutch

pedal is not fully depressed before the transmis-

sion is shifted, a gear noise may be heard.

Transmission damage could occur.

CAUTION

Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may damage

the clutch.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-13

computer display. See “Trip computer” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section for the display

setting information.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to

road conditions, the weather and individual driv-

ing habits.

Use the up-shift indicator when driving as fol-

lows:

If the maximum engine speed is desired, set

the figure at 6,600 rpm. (The indicator starts

flashing from about 6,100 rpm and comes on

steady at 6,600 rpm.)

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas

[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

If the maximum engine torque is desired, set

the figure at 4,800 rpm. (The indicator starts

flashing from about 4,300 rpm and comes on

steady at 4,800 rpm.)

Gear change

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)

8 (13)

16 (26)

25 (40)

30 (50)

33 (53)

SSD0278

If you want to break in your vehicle, use of the

up-shift indicator with a rather low figure will

help you to avoid the high engine speed.

Up-shift indicator

The manual transmission up-shift indicator is

located in the tachometer and shows the driver

the timing to shift into a higher gear by illuminat-

ing. The use of the up-shift indicator will help you

to upshift at a constant engine speed (rpm) from

any gear.

To make the up-shift indicator not come on, set

the figure at above 7,600 rpm.

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas or in

high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

There may be a slight difference between

the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-

nation and the tachometer indication.

Gear change

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)

15 (24)

25 (40)

40 (64)

45 (72)

50 (80)

The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the

engine speed is within about 500 rpm of the set

figure while driving, and then illuminate after the

engine speed reaches the set figure.

The engine speed in revolutions per minute

(rpm) for upshifting can be set on the trip

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-14 Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

Suggested maximum speed in each

gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive

according to the road conditions, which will

ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the en-

gine when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to do

so can cause brake failure and lead

to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

Do not use the gear shift in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully en-

gaged.

Gear

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

MPH (km/h)

35 (56)

60 (96)

90 (144)

—

SPA2110

To apply: pull the parking brake lever up 1 .

To release:

Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the park-

ing brake and cause an accident.

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

5th

—

6th

—

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-

tion.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button

and lower the

lever completely 3 .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-15

CRUISE CONTROL (if so

equipped)

cause engine damage.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator light

on the meter panel then blinks to warn the

driver.

In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

If the engine coolant temperature becomes

excessively high, the cruise control system

will be canceled automatically.

On winding or hilly roads.

On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.).

SSD0528

If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control MAIN (ON⋅OFF) switch off and

have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

In very windy areas.

1. ACCEL or RESUME switch

2. COAST or SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control MAIN switch is turned on while

pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise

control system, perform the preceding steps

in the order indicated.

4. MAIN (ON⋅OFF) switch

CAUTION

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N(Neutral) without depressing

the clutch pedal when the cruise control

is set. Should this occur, depress the

clutch pedal and turn the main switch

off immediately. Failure to do so may

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the

meter panel will come on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-16 Starting and driving

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle

to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET

switch and release it. (The SET indicator light

will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the

set speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

If you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission) or move the selector lever to N

(Neutral) position (automatic transmission),

the cruise control will be canceled.

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES set switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the pedal,

the vehicle will return to the previously set

speed.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

b) Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch; The SET indicator

light will go out.

c) Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES

set switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light

will go out.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator and SET indicator lights will go out.

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES set switch and reset at the

cruising speed, turn the MAIN switch off

once and then turn it on again.

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle

attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

The cruise control will automatically be can-

celled if the vehicle slows down more than

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-17

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

CAUTION

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tion” in the “9. Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section.

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance and

ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear

as soon as possible.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

Keep your engine tuned up.

Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

Avoid quick starts.

Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure will increase tire wear

and lower fuel economy.

Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km).

Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment will increase tire wear

and lower fuel economy.

Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-18 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING

Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

automatic transmission models or in

an appropriate gear for manual

transmission models. Failure to do

so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result

in an accident.

Make sure the automatic transmis-

sion selector lever has been pushed

as far forward as it can go and cannot

be moved without depressing the

button at the end of the lever.

MSD0002

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a sloping drive

way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels

as illustrated.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place

the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position.

Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle.

Turn the wheels into the curband move the

vehicle forward until the curbside wheel

gently touches the curb.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-19

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

Turn the wheels away from the curband

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will

still have control of the vehicle. However, much

greater steering effort is needed, especially in

sharp turns or at low speeds.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

Vacuum assisted brakes

CURB:

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and the stopping

distance will be longer.

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the center

of the road if it moves.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be much harder to operate.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This overheats the brakes, increases

wear on the brakes and pads, and reduces gas

mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-20 Starting and driving

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

Normal operation

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system will not operate at

speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to

completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will

vary according to road conditions.) When the

anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator (under the

hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic

pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly).

While the actuator is working, you may feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from the actuator under the hood. This

is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system

is working properly. However, the pulsation may

indicate that road conditions are hazardous and

extra care is required while driving.

While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

or accelerating could cause the

wheels to skid and result in an acci-

dent.

This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-

vice manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes

so the wheels will not lock when braking abruptly

or when braking on slippery surfaces. The sys-

tem detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent

each wheel from locking and sliding. By prevent-

ing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver

maintain steering control and helps to minimize

swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

Self-test feature

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic

sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids

controlled by a computer. The computer has a

built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move the

vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and is not an indication of any

malfunction. If the computer senses any mal-

function, it switches the anti-lock brake system

off and turns on the ABS warning light in the

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-21

TRACTIONCONTROL SYSTEM

(TCS) (if so equipped)

On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads,

vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is

accelerated. This wheel spin reduces accelera-

tion, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus

decreasing vehicle stability.

instrument panel. The brake system then oper-

ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

Tire type and condition of tires may also

affect braking effectiveness.

If the light comes on during the self-test or while

driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for

repair.

When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires to the front and

rear.

When the vehicle drive wheels begin to spin, the

traction control system (TCS) controls the en-

gine torque using an electronic control system,

and it also controls automatic control shifting if

necessary (for automatic transmission models).

This reduces spinning of the drive wheels, and

result in improved vehicle acceleration perfor-

mance. It also improves the vehicle stability by

swerving motion.

WARNING

When installing a spare tire, make

sure it is the proper size and type as

specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See “Vehicle iden-

tification” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel location.

The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-

ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-

cidents resulting from careless or dan-

gerous driving techniques. It can help

maintain vehicle control during braking

on slippery surfaces but remember that

the stopping distance on slippery sur-

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with the anti-lock brake

system. Stopping distances may also be

longer on rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,

the responsibility for safety of self and

others rests in the hands of the driver.

When the traction control system is operat-

ing, the slip indicator light in the meter panel

blinks.

If the slip indicator light blinks, the vehicle is

under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive

carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac-

tion control system (TCS) off indicator light”

in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the traction control

system, the SLIP and

indicator lights

come on in the meter panel.

As long as these indicator lights are on, the

traction control function (except the ABS) is

canceled. The vehicle will behaves like a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-22 Starting and driving

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

model without the traction control system.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-

faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors

detect these movements and control the braking

and engine output to help improve vehicle sta-

bility.

The ABLS system works when one of the driving

wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The

ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel, which

distributes the driving power to the other driving

wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the VDC

system turned off, all VDC system functions and

TCS functions will be turned off. The ABLS

system and ABS will still operate with the VDC

system off. When the ABLS system is activated,

the “SLIP” indicator light will blink and you may

hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

The traction control system is designed

to prevent the wheels from spinning.

However, it does not prevent vehicle

slipping or spinning due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Be especially careful when driving on

slippery surfaces and always drive

safely.

When the VDC system is operating, the

“SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel

blinks.

When only the Traction Control System

(TCS) portion of the VDC system is operat-

ing, the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument

panel blinks.

While the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

feel a vibration from under the hood. This is

normal and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road condi-

tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. Be

sure to drive carefully. See “Slip indicator

light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

The VDC system computer has a built-in diag-

nostic feature that tests the system each time

you start the engine and move the vehicle at a

low speed forward or backward. When the

self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

“SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator lights illumi-

nate in the instrument panel. As long as these

indicators are illuminated, the VDC system

function is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited

Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-23

tor or “SLIP” indicator or both indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

tem may not operate properly and the

“VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indi-

cator or both indicator lights may

illuminate.

WARNING

The VDC system is designed to help

improve driving stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

due to careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed

and be especially careful when driv-

ing and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

standard equipment or are extremely

deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indica-

tor or “SLIP” indicator or both indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow-covered road.

When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the “VDC OFF” indi-

cator or “SLIP” indicator or both

indicator lights may illuminate. Do

not drive on these types of roads.

If engine related parts such as a muf-

fler are not standard equipment or

are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC

OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or

both indicator lights may illuminate.

When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or

“SLIP” indicator or both indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a

malfunction. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars and bushings are not

NISSAN-approved or are extremely

deteriorated the VDC system may not

operate properly. This could ad-

versely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the “VDC OFF” indica-

If wheels or tires other than those

recommended are used, the VDC sys-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-24 Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

TIRE EQUIPMENT

size tires will cause damage to the ve-

hicle. If you plan to use tire

chains/cables, you should install

245/45R18 size tires on your vehicle.

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the

lock becomes frozen, heat the key before insert-

ing it into the key hole.

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle

on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends

the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON

tires on all four wheels. Consult a NISSAN

dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

ANTI-FREEZE

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are of proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom-

mended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure

a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must

be secured or removed to prevent the possibility

of whipping action damage to the fenders or

underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive

at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check

anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For additional information, see “Engine Cooling

System” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some provinces

and states prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain

maximum efficiency, the battery should be

checked regularly. For additional information,

see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

Skid and traction capabilities of stud-

ded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces,

may be poorer than that of non-studded

snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

CAUTION

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the

drain plug located under the radiator. Refill

before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cool-

ing system” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section for changing engine coolant.

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed

on 265/35R19 size tires. Installation of

the tire chains/cables on 265/35R19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-25

be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-

mance may be adversely affected.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steer-

ing maneuvers.

Never install the tire chains on a T-type

spare tire.

WARNING

Do not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

Do not use the tire chains on dry roads.

Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions. Try to avoid

driving on wet ice until the road is

salted or sanded.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold

temperature starting is available through

NISSAN dealer.

a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

WARNING

Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

Do not use your heater with an un-

grounded electrical system or two-

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be

injured by an electrical shock if you use

an ungrounded connection.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-26 Starting and driving

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 5-27

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-28 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire .................................................................................... 6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ................. 6-2

Changing a flat tire ......................................................... 6-2

Jump starting ......................................................................... 6-7

Push starting .......................................................................... 6-9

If your vehicle overheats ..................................................... 6-9

Towing your vehicle ........................................................... 6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN ......................... 6-11

Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 6-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

WARNING

This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. The sys-

tem also displays pressure of all tires (except the

spare tire) on the trip computer by sending a

signal from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of

it by the low tire pressure warning light (in the

meter panel) or the PSI indicator (on the trip

computer). This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). For more details, refer to “Trip com-

puter” and “Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section and “Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates and/or the PSI indicator

flashes while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt brak-

ing, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information

label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away

from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash. Contact your

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R

(Reverse) position (automatic transmission in

P (Park) position).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-2 In case of emergency

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the manual trans-

mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or

the automatic transmission into P

(Park).

MCE0001A

SCE0409

Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

Coupe models

Blocking wheels

Getting the spare tire and tools

Place suitable blocks

at both the front and

Remove spare tire and jacking tools from the

storage area located in the luggage/trunk as

illustrated.

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

to prevent the vehicle from moving when it

is jacked up.

Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

Coupe models:

1. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counterclock-

wise to remove.

WARNING

2. Jack — Turn it counterclockwise to remove.

3. Jacking tools

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-

hicle may move and result in personal

injury.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of emergency 6-3

on other vehicles. The jack is de-

signed for lifting only your vehicle

during a tire change.

Use the correct jack up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause

the vehicle to move. This is especially

true for vehicles with limited slip dif-

ferentials.

SCE0491

SCE0410A

Jacking up the^Jav^ce^kh^-ui^pc^ple^oina^tnd removing

the damaged tire

Roadster models

Roadster models:

1. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Jack — Unfasten the belt and lift the jack up

to remove.

WARNING

Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

3. Jacking tools — They are in the tool bag.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point

as illustrated above so that top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack up point.

Align the jack head between the two notches

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-4 In case of emergency

in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the

groove of the jack head between the notches

as shown.

CE1092-A

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears

the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold

the jack lever and rod with both hands as

shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of emergency 6-5

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

Wheel nut tightening torque:

illustrated ( 1

5 ) until they are tight.

k k

80 ft-lb (108 N⋅m)

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches

the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench,

tighten the wheel nuts securely in the se-

quence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle com-

pletely.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

WARNING

After vehicle has been parked for three

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

SCE0039

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver’s side center pillar.

Installing the spare tire

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

For models equipped with the tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS):

Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire

pressure, the display of the tire pressure infor-

mation may show higher pressure than the

COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been

driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because

the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises.

This does not indicate a system malfunction.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the

wheel nuts finger tight. When replacing a

front tire, make sure the hole in the spare tire

wheel is aligned with the pin on the brake

rotor.

As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with

wrench.

torque

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Securely store the spare tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-6 In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop.

Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

WARNING

If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions

under the heading “Wheels and tires”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away

from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

Keep battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

The booster battery must be rated at

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of emergency 6-7

CAUTION

Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, etc. — not to the battery).

Make sure that the jumper cables do

not touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

SCE0492

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it

run for a few minutes.

the N (Neutral) position (On automatic trans-

mission models, move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position). Switch off all unnec-

essary electrical systems (light, heater, air

conditioner, etc.).

WARNING

6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at

about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the

normal manner.

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

CAUTION

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, turn the key

off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying

again.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries into close proximity to each other.

illustrated. ( 1

4 )

k k

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-8 In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING

7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the

vent holes as it may be contaminated with

corrosive acid.

Do not continue to drive if your ve-

hicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle

fire.

Automatic transmission models can-

not be push started. Attempting to do

so may cause transmission damage.

To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the ra-

diator cap is removed, pressurized

hot water will spurt out, possibly

causing serious injury.

Three-way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing

since the three-way catalyst may be

damaged.

Never try to start the vehicle by tow-

ing it; when the engine starts, the

forward surge could cause the ve-

hicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the

parking brake and move the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission

to the P (Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of emergency 6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

windows, and move the temperature control

to maximum hot and the fan control to high

speed.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must

be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could

damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are

available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service

operators are generally familiar with the appli-

cable laws and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a

service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable

to have the service operator carefully read the

following precautions.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or get caught in, engine

belts or the engine cooling fan.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a

long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast

idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the tem-

perature gauge indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant

is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open

the hood further until no steam or coolant can

be seen.

The engine cooling fan can start at

any time when the coolant tempera-

ture is high.

7. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the reservoir tank with the engine

running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if

necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

5. Open the engine hood.

Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

WARNING

Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

CAUTION

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.

The radiator hoses and radiator should not

leak water.

When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does

not run, stop the engine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-10 In case of emergency

tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies

must be used.

Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”

in the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

SCE0342

SCE0489

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

CAUTION

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of emergency 6-11

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward) as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transmission.

If it is necessary to tow the vehicle

with the front wheels raised, always

use towing dollies under the rear

wheels.

WARNING

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode

and result in serious injury. Parts of

your vehicle could also overheat and

be damaged.

When towing rear wheel drive mod-

els with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies:

CAUTION

Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-

sition, and secure the steering wheel

in a straight ahead position with a

rope or similar device. Never secure

the steering wheel by turning the

ignition key to the LOCK position.

This may damage the steering lock

mechanism.

SCE0605

Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to the vehicle recovery

hooks or main structural members of

the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle

body will be damaged.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a

stuck vehicle)

Use the recovery hook by installing it in the front

of the vehicle. (The rear has no towing points.)

1. Remove the front license plate (if so

equipped).

Do not use the vehicle tie downs to

free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,

mud, etc. Never tow a vehicle using

the vehicle tie downs or recovery

hooks.

2. Remove the recovery hook cover

bumper.

from the

3. Securely install the recovery hook

with jacking tools.

stored

Always pull the cable straight out

from the front of the vehicle. Never

Make sure that the hook is properly secured in

the stored place after use.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-12 In case of emergency

maintain the rocking motion.

pull on the vehicle at an angle.

Release the accelerator pedal before shifting

between R and D (automatic transmission

models) or 1st and R (manual transmission

models).

Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the

suspension, steering, brake or cool-

ing systems.

Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

Pull devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use

in vehicle towing or recovery.

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries,

contact a professional towing service to re-

move the vehicle.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System

(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and

D (drive) (automatic transmission models) or

1st (low) and R (reverse) (manual transmis-

sion models).

Apply the accelerator as little as possible to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of emergency 6-13

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-14 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................................................... 7-2

Washing ............................................................................ 7-2

Waxing ............................................................................... 7-3

Removing spots .............................................................. 7-3

Underbody ........................................................................ 7-3

Glass .................................................................................. 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels .................................................. 7-4

Chrome parts ................................................................... 7-4

Tire dressing .................................................................... 7-4

Cleaning interior .................................................................... 7-5

Floor mats ......................................................................... 7-5

Seat belts ......................................................................... 7-6

Corrosion protection ............................................................ 7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ........................................................................... 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ........................................................................... 7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ..................... 7-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

water on the parts around the soft

top and the windows. These may

cause water to leak into the inside of

your vehicle.

CAUTION

In the following cases, please wash your vehicle

as soon as possible to protect the paint surface.

Do not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gasoline

or solvents.

After a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean

water.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

After driving on coastal roads

When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on

the paint surface

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

When dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

For Roadster models, observe the

following:

• Do not use an automatic car wash

or a high pressure car wash. The

soft top may be damaged.

• Avoid applying direct water pres-

sure, such as high pressured water

from household hoses, on the lin-

ing of the soft top and vehicle

body. Avoid applying continuous

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

Soft top care and cleaning (Roadster

models)

Proper care and handling should be observed to

maintain a good appearance of the soft top.

Improper care may cause the top cloth’s surface

to stiffen, stain, or mat. Follow the instructions

shown in this section.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or a

general purpose dish-washing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

It is not necessary to wash the soft top every

time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7-2 Appearance and care

top regularly before it becomes quite dirty. Leav-

ing the soft top dirty or soiled for a long period

will cause deterioration to the quality of the top

material.

REMOVING SPOTS

cause water to leak into the inside of

your vehicle.

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a soft

brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of

clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash

using a mild detergent, such as a general

cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a

general purpose dish-washing liquid, mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the top

again with plenty of clean water to remove all

traces of soap.

After cleaning, always be sure the top and its

storage are completely dry before opening the

top. Opening the top while it is wet or damp may

cause interior water damage, water stains or

mildew on the top.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and caus-

ing underbody and suspension corrosion. Be-

fore the winter period and again in the spring, the

underseal must be checked and, if necessary,

re-treated.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing

is recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

CAUTION

GLASS

Do not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gasoline

or solvents.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,

immediately wash it off with clean

water.

Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Do not apply direct water pressure,

such as high pressured water from

household hoses, on the lining of the

soft top and vehicle body, as this may

CAUTION

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull

the finish or leave swirl marks.

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appearance and care 7-3

Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could

damage the electrical conductors or

rear window defroster elements.

ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

after the cleaner is applied.

Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,

immediately wash it off with clean

water. (Roadster models)

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

TIRE DRESSING

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it

may react with the coating and form a com-

pound. This compound may come off the tire

while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating

on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves

(where it would be difficult to remove).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7-4 Appearance and care

CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with

a dry soft cloth.

natural finish.

Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric

protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn.

SAI0012

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

Floor mat positioning aid

(driver’s side only)

CAUTION

This model includes a front floor mat bracket to

act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your

vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a

grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position

the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through

the floor mat grommet hole while centering the

mat in the floorpan contour.

Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather

Periodically check to make certain that the mats

are properly positioned.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appearance and care 7-5

CORROSIONPROTECTION

SEAT BELTS

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Temperature

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely before using

them. See “Seat belt maintenance” in the “1.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section.

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint sur-

faces.

Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

WARNING

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these may severely weaken

the seat belt webbing.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

Relative humidity

Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7-6 Appearance and care

CAUTION

Never remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas,

consult a NISSAN dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ................................................. 8-2

General maintenance ........................................................... 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items ............... 8-2

Maintenance precautions ................................................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations ............................. 8-7

Engine cooling system ........................................................ 8-8

Checking engine coolant level .................................... 8-8

Changing engine coolant ............................................. 8-9

Engine oil ............................................................................. 8-10

Checking engine oil level ........................................... 8-10

Changing engine oil and filter ................................... 8-10

Automatic transmission fluid ........................................... 8-12

Power steering fluid .......................................................... 8-13

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................................... 8-13

Brake fluid ....................................................................... 8-14

Clutch fluid ..................................................................... 8-14

Window washer fluid ........................................................ 8-14

Battery ................................................................................... 8-15

Jump starting ................................................................. 8-17

Drive belts ............................................................................ 8-17

Spark plugs ......................................................................... 8-18

Replacing spark plugs ................................................ 8-18

Air cleaner ............................................................................ 8-18

Windshield wiper blades ................................................. 8-19

Cleaning ......................................................................... 8-19

Replacing ....................................................................... 8-20

Parking brake and brake pedal ...................................... 8-21

Checking parking brake ............................................. 8-21

Checking brake pedal ................................................. 8-21

Brake booster ................................................................ 8-22

Fuses ..................................................................................... 8-22

Engine compartment ................................................... 8-23

Passenger compartment ............................................ 8-24

Keyfobbattery replacement ............................................ 8-25

Lights ..................................................................................... 8-26

Headlights ...................................................................... 8-27

Exterior and interior lights .......................................... 8-28

Wheels and tires ................................................................ 8-30

Tire pressure ................................................................. 8-30

Tire labeling..................................................................... 8-34

Types of tires ................................................................. 8-36

Tire chains ...................................................................... 8-37

Changing wheels and tires ........................................ 8-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with longer

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your

NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well

as its emission and engine performance.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service:

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and tuned by a NISSAN dealer.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up to date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN

vehicles before they work on your vehicle,

rather than after they have worked on it.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required and op-

tional scheduled maintenance items are de-

scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that

guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is

performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements of your ve-

hicle — in a reliable and economic way.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as

the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that

all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-to-

day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

age, cuts or excessive wear.

Check the brake booster function. Be sure to

keep floor mat away from the pedal.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified re-

pair facility.

Parking brake*: Check that the lever/pedal

has the proper travel and make sure that the

vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when

only the parking brake is applied.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and

check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

restraints move up and down smoothly and that

the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all

latched positions.

Inside the vehicle

Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated in this

vehicle.

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the

vehicle, etc.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for

wheel alignment.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position

mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the

vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any

brakes.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal does

not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor

mat away from the pedal.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all

warning lights and chimes are operating prop-

erly.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust

the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to

the pressure specified. Check carefully for dam-

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal

for smooth operation and make sure it has the

proper distance under it when depressed fully.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and

in good quantity when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

and correct it. (See “Precautions when starting

and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care” sec-

tion.

Window washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the tank.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off.

Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the

MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration

or loose connections.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is

frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-

late. For additional information, see “Cleaning

Engine oil level*: Check the level on the

dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot,

turning off the engine and waiting 10 minutes.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

tion switch is in the ONposition.

On gasoline engine models with the

multiport fuel injection (MFI) system,

the fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

WARNING

It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. For manual trans-

mission models, move the shift lever

to N(Neutral) position. For automatic

transmission models, move the se-

lector lever to P (Park).

CAUTION

Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine off

and wait until it cools down.

Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

Avoid contact with used engine oil

and coolant. Improperly disposed en-

gine oil, engine coolant and/or other

vehicle fluids can damage the envi-

ronment. Always conform to local

regulations for disposal of vehicle

fluid.

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing

any parts replacement or repairs.

Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the igni-

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also avail-

able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

der information” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete or im-

proper servicing may result in operating difficul-

ties or excessive emissions, and could affect

your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any

servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T models)

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

7. Power steering fluid reservoir

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Air cleaner

Do not tamper with the strut tower bar

adjustment k. The strut tower bar has

been adjusted to the most suitable posi-

tion at the factory.

CAUTION

Tampering with the strut tower bar ad-

justment may cause a noise while driv-

ing or damage to the hood or engine.

SDI1519

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-

ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains

rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional

cooling system additives are not necessary.

Deminer-

alized

water/

distilled

water

Outside temperature

down to

Anti-

freeze

°C

°F

−35

−30

50%

WARNING

Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator

cool down. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator. See precau-

tions in “If your vehicle overheats”

found in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or

equivalent with the proper mixture ratio

of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineral-

ized water/distilled water. The use of

other types of coolant solutions may

damage your engine cooling system.

SDI1445

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank

when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is

below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If

the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX

level.

The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent

engine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

If the engine cooling system frequently

requires coolant, have it checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheating.

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture

of anti-freeze solution and demineralized

water/distilled water. Fill the reservoir tank up

to the MAX level. Then install the radiator filler

cap.

WARNING

To avoid being scalded, never change

the coolant when the engine is hot.

4. Start the engine and warm it up until it

reaches normal operating temperature. Then

race the engine 2 or 3 times under no load.

Watch the engine coolant temperature

gauge for signs of overheating.

Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

5. Stop the engine. After it completely cools

down, refill the radiator up to the filler open-

ing. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level.

Check the drain plug for any sign of leakage.

Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

6. Recheck the coolant level after the vehicle

has been driven for a day.

Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

1. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of

radiator, and remove radiator filler cap.

SDI1442

Be careful not to allow coolant to con-

tact drive belts.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Waste coolant must be disposed of

properly. Check your local regulations.

Major cooling system repairs should be per-

formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service

procedures can be found in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual.

2. Close the radiator drain plug securely after

the coolant is drained.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

ENGINE OIL

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine,

and such damage is not covered by

warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND

FILTER

Change the engine oil and filter according to the

maintenance log shown in the Service and Main-

tenance Guide.

SDI1386C

SDI1781

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H and L marks

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

parking brake.

Vehicle set-up

k. If the oil level is below the L mark k,

remove the oil filler cap and pour recom-

mended oil through the opening. Do not

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

overfill k.

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Rein-

sert it all the way.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suit-

able floor jack and safety jack stands.

Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle

jack-up points.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

A suitable adapter should be attached to the

jack stand saddle.

Check your local regulations.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

2 . Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at the center

point of the undercover.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gas-

ket remaining on the mounting surface

of the engine.

b. Then remove the other bolts that hold the

undercover in place.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

CAUTION

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight

resistance is felt, then tighten additionally

more than 2/3 turn.

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

SDI1520A

Oil filter tightening torque:

Engine oil and filter

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N⋅m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a

wrench.

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

1 .

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and

completely drain the oil.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N⋅m)

CAUTION

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil and in-

stall the cap securely.

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

hole in the frame, then push the center of the

clip in to lock the clip in place.

CAUTION

d. Install the other bolts that hold the under-

cover in place. Be careful not to strip the

bolts or over-tighten them.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place to

prevent oil spillage from the dipstick

hole while filling the engine with oil.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J

ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J

ATF will cause deterioration in drive-

ability and automatic transmission

durability, and may damage the auto-

matic transmission, which is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for drain and refill capac-

ity. The drain and refill capacity depends on

the oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine the proper amount

of oil in the engine.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin can-

cer.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dip-

stick. Add engine oil if necessary.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is

also described on caution labels located in the

engine compartment.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into position as

outlined in the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into position.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover into the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

For additional brake and clutch fluid information,

refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Do not overfill.

Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior or con-

taminated fluid may damage the brake

system. Do not add synthetic brake

fluid. The use of improper fluids can

damage the brake system and affect the

vehicle’s stopping ability.

SDI1443

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

CAUTION

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

range at fluid temperatures of 122 - 176°F (50 -

80°C) or using the COLD range at fluid tem-

peratures of 32 - 86°F (0 - 30°C).

Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint. If

fluid is spilled, immediately wash the

surface with water.

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fill

through the opening.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

SDI0847

SDI1478

SDI1444

Open the cap and add fluid when the low

washer fluid warning light comes on.

BRAKE FLUID

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line or the brake warning light

comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to

the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently,

the system should be thoroughly checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid

level is below the MIN. line, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX. line.

Add a washer solvent to the washer fluid for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

If fluid is added frequently, the system should be

thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BATTERY

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any

corrosion should be washed off with a solu-

tion of baking soda and water.

washer reservoir tank to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the (−) negative battery

terminal to prevent discharging it.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of the front doors. The automatic win-

dow adjusting function will not work,

and the side roof panel/top side rail

may be damaged by doing so.

Do not fill the window washer reser-

voir tank with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal, perform the procedure in the follow-

ing order. Otherwise, the window and the

side roof panel/top side rail may contact

and be damaged.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the window washer reser-

voir tank. Do not use the window

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

3. Close and lock all the doors using the

key or keyfob.

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or

painted surfaces. After touching a

battery or battery cap, do not touch

or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 min-

utes and seek medical attention.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-

minal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery termi-

nal, perform the procedure in the following

order. Otherwise, the window and the side

roof panel/top side rail may contact and be

damaged.

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the bat-

tery which can generate heat, reduce

battery life, and in some cases lead

to an explosion.

1. Unlock (using the key) and open the

driver side door. Do not close the door.

DI0137MA

2. Open the hood.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be

3. Connect the negative (−) battery termi-

nal. Then close the hood.

between the UPPER LEVEL k and LOWER

When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

LEVEL k lines.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

5. Close the driver side door and the win-

dow.

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after han-

dling.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

WARNING

Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas,

generated by battery fluid, is explo-

sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

1. Remove the cell plugs k.

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

line k.

3. Tighten cell plugs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness.

If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have

it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension.

SDI1480

SDI1389A

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Alternator

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the

engine does not start by jump starting, the

battery may have to be replaced. Contact a

NISSAN dealer.

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

̄: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

SPARK PLUGS

AIR CLEANER

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer

for servicing.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

SDI0145

SDI1446A

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, pull off

the lock pins and pull the unit upward 2 .

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinum-tipped

spark plugs as frequently as the conventional

type spark plugs since they will last much longer.

Follow the maintenance log but, do not reuse

them by cleaning or regapping.

The filter element should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the “Service and Maintenance

Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe the

inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

Always

replace

with

recommended

platinum-tipped spark plugs.

WARNING

Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CAUTION

rinse the blade with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops the

flame if the engine backfires. If it is

not there, and the engine backfires,

you could be burned. Do not drive

with the air cleaner removed, and be

careful when working on the engine

with the air cleaner removed.

After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged when

the engine hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing

with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

SDI1649

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab k, then move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm to remove 1 .

SDI1730A

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm

until a click sounds.

If necessary, clean the windshield washer

nozzle k with a needle or small pin k.

*1: Only for passenger’s side wiper arm

*2: Adjustable washer nozzles

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE

PEDAL

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

SDI1447A

DI1020MO

Brake pad wear indicators

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have au-

dible wear indicators. When a brake pad re-

quires replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle

is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as

possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

From the released position, pull the parking

brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of

clicks is out of the range listed below, see a

NISSAN dealer.

With the engine running, check the distance k

between the upper surface of the pedal and the

metal floor. If it is out of the range shown below,

see a NISSAN dealer.

6 - 7 clicks under pulling force of 45 lb(200

Distance k: Under depressing force of 110 lb

(490 N)

Automatic

Transmission model

Manual

Transmission model

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect

the function or performance of the brake system.

3.74 in (95 mm) or more 3.54 in (90 mm) or more

Proper brake inspection intervals should

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

FUSES

be followed. For additional information, see the

appropriate maintenance log shown in the

NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release the

brake pedal several times. When brake pedal

movement (distance of travel) remains the

same from one pedal application to the next,

continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the

engine. The pedal height should drop a little.

SDI1751

SDI1752

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the

engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for

about 30 seconds, the pedal height should

not change.

Some vehicles are equipped with engine com-

partment and passenger compartment fuse

If a type k fuse is used to replace a type k

fuse, the type k fuse will not be level with the

boxes that use only type k fuses. Other ve-

fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will

not affect the performance of the fuse. Make

sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

hicles are equipped with type k fuses in the

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-

pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times. The

pedal travel distance will decrease gradually

with each depression as the vacuum is re-

leased from the booster.

engine compartment fuse box and type k fuses

in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type k fuses cannot be installed in the under-

Type k fuses are provided as spare fuses. They

hood fuse boxes. Only use type k fuses in the

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

underhood fuse boxes.

If the brakes do not operate properly, see a

NISSAN dealer.

Type k fuses can be installed in the engine

compartment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

SDI1479B

SDI1753

2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover

on the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by

CAUTION

pushing the tabs

and lifting the cover 2 .

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the passenger com-

partment fuse box.

5. If the fuse is open k, replace it with a new

fuse k. Spare fuses are stored in the pas-

senger compartment fuse box.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and headlight

switch are OFF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

SDI1962

SDI1754

2. Open the fuse box lid 1 .

4. If the fuse is open k, replace it with a new

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

fuse k. Spare fuses

are stored in the

3. Pinch the fuse perpendicularly with the fuse

puller and pull it out.

fuse box.

CAUTION

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

KEYFOB BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

Make sure that the ⊕ side faces the

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

bottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

4. Push the keyfobbutton two or three times to

check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance

for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 4

above.

Be careful not to touch the circuit board

and the battery terminal.

An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

The keyfob is water-resistant; however,

if it gets wet, immediately wipe it com-

pletely dry.

SDI1608

When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the keyfob.

Replace the battery as follows:

FCC Notice:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-

lent

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

LIGHTS

k Front view

1. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam)

2. Spot light

3. Front park light

4. Front turn signal light

5. Front side marker light

k Rear view (Coupe),

k Rear view (Roadster)

6. Luggage compartment light (Coupe) or Trunk

light (Roadster)

7. High-mounted stop light

8. Rear combination light

(Side marker, Stop/Tail)

9. License plate lights

10. Rear combination light

(Back-up, Turn signal)

SDI1950

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS

CAUTION

Replacing

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

Xenon headlight bulb:

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed:

Bulb no. (Wattage)

D2S (35W) - Xenon low/high-beam

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. Always have your xe-

non headlights replaced at a NISSAN

dealer. For additional information, see

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item

Front turn signal light*

Front park light*

Wattage (W)

BulbNo.

3457NA

T10

28/8

Front side marker light*

Rear combination light (Upper)

Stop/Tail*

(LED)

—

(LED)

—

Side marker*

Rear combination light (Lower)

Back-up*

T20

T10

—

Turn signal*

License plate light (x 2)

High-mounted stop light*

Spot light

(LED)

—

Luggage compartment light (Coupe)

Trunk light (Roadster)*

Vanity mirror light

—

MDI0006

3.4

1.8

1.1

1.4

—

Replacement procedures

—

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or

cover.

Cup holder light*

—

Rear floor box light*

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

—

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI1779

SDI1572

Interior light (Roadster)

Be careful not to snap the nails k on the plastic

cover when removing it.

SDI1451

SDI1450A

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

WHEELS AND TIRES

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long

distance trips. The recommended tire

pressure specifications are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label under

the “COLD TIRE PRESSURE” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. The sys-

tem also displays pressure of all tires (except the

spare tire) on the trip computer by sending a

signal from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel.

SDI1401A

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also,

this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

¼ Most tires naturally lose air over time.

¼ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curbwhile

parking.

For more details, refer to “Trip computer” and

“Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “6. In

case of emergency” section.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-

erate speeds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

also result in failure of other

vehicle components.

¼ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

WARNING

¼ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an acci-

dent.

¼ Do not drive your vehicle over

85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is

equipped with high speed rated

tires. Driving faster than 85

MPH (137 km/h) may result in

tire failure, loss of control and

possible injury.

¼ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing (GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The

vehicle weight capacity is indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading

Information label. Do not load

your vehicle beyond this capac-

ity. Overloading your vehicle

may result in reduced tire life,

unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling charac-

teristics and could also lead to

a serious accident. Loading be-

yond the specified capacity may

¼ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The recommended cold tire inflation

is set by the manufacturer to provide

the best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”

later in this section.

Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped).

SDI1948

Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-

mation in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

Tire and loading information label

Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

Original size: The size of the tires

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

3. Remove the gauge.

Cold Tire

Inflation

Coupe

model

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

Size

Pressure

Front

Original

Tire

225/45R18

245/40R18

240 kPa

(35 psi)

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of the

gauge stem to release pressure. Re-

check the pressure and add or release

air as needed.

Rear

Original

Tire

245/45R18

265/35R19

240 kPa

(35 psi)

Spare

Tire

420 kPa

(60 psi)

T145/80D17

SDI1949

6. Install the valve stem cap.

Checking the tire pressure

Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Roadster

model

Size

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

Front

Original

Tire

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem sideways,

or air will escape. If the hissing sound

of air escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, reposi-

tion the gauge to eliminate this leak-

age.

240 kPa

(35 psi)

225/45R18

Rear

Original

Tire

240 kPa

(35 psi)

245/45R18

Spare

Tire

420 kPa

(60 psi)

T145/80D17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

SDI1575

SDI1951

7. Tire Speed Rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers

to place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of

a recall.

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles. (Not all

tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of the

tire from sidewall edge to sidewall

edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example, the

numbers 3103 means the 31st week

of 2003. If these numbers are missing,

then look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

SDI1607

Example

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The

symbol can be placed above,

below or to the left or right of the

Tire Identification Number.

Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white letter-

ing or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identi-

fication mark

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum deeper than the same molding on the

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the

outward facing sidewall of an asymmetri-

cal tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

Snow tires

pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

TYPES OF TIRES

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

WARNING

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance for use all

year round, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than all season

tires and may be more appropriate in some

areas.

When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same

type (i.e., Summer, All Season or

Snow) and construction. A NISSAN

dealer may be able to help you with

information about tire type, size,

speed rating and availability.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some provinces and

states prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than

that of non-studded snow tires.

Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be

substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the tire

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

mended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure

a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must

be secured or removed to prevent the possibility

of whipping action damage to the fenders or

undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition,

drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your ve-

hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

TIRE CHAINS

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

CAUTION

Tires cannot be rotated in this vehicle, as

front tires are different size from rear tires

and the direction of wheel rotation is fixed

in each tire.

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed

on 265/35R19 size tires. Installation of

the tire chains/cables on 265/35R19

size tires will cause damage to the ve-

hicle. If you plan to use tire

chains/cables, you should install

245/45R18 size tires on your vehicle.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent

the rear wheels from being installed in

place of the front wheels. The spare tire

can be installed in place of the front and

rear wheels. When installing the spare

tire in the front wheel, the hole in the

spare tire wheel must be aligned with the

pin on the brake rotor.

Never install the tire chains on a T-type

spare tire.

Do not use the tire chains on dry roads.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are of proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

the tire(s) should be replaced.

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

¼ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed

rating and load carrying capacity as originally

equipped. See “Specifications” in the “9. Tech-

nical and consumer information” section for rec-

ommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.

¼ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

WARNING

SDI1663

The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration,

headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to

accidents and could result in serious

personal injury.

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

¼ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

¼ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

¼ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

If the wheels are changed for any

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

to maintain their appearance.

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear,

possibly degraded vehicle handling

characteristics and/or interference

with the brake discs/drums. Such in-

terference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear.

damage and could fail without warn-

ing.

Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

The use of retread tire is not recom-

mended.

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

NISSAN recommends that the road wheels

be waxed to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting.

Wheel balance

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

Observe the following precautions if the T-type

spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an accident.

Wheel balance service should be performed

with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing

the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to

transmission damage.

CAUTION

Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

The T-type spare tire should be used

for emergency use only. It should be

replaced by the standard tire at the

first opportunity.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information booklet.

Do not install a deformed wheel or

tire even if it has been repaired. Such

wheels or tires could have structural

Drive carefully while the T-type spare

tire is installed.

Care of wheels

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking

while driving.

Do not use the T-type spare tire on

other vehicles.

Periodically check the T-type spare

tire inflation pressure, and always

keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

Do not use more than one T-type

spare tire at the same time.

Do not tow a trailer while the T-type

spare tire is installed.

Do not drive your vehicle at speeds

faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

Do not use tire chains on a T-type

spare tire. Tire chains will not fit

properly on the T-type spare tire and

may cause damage to the vehicle.

Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will

wear at a faster rate than the stan-

dard tire. Replace the T-type spare

tire as soon as the tread wear indica-

tors appear.

Because the T-type spare tire is

smaller than the original tire, ground

clearance is reduced. To avoid dam-

age to the vehicle, do not drive over

obstacles. Also, do not drive the ve-

hicle through an automatic car wash

since it may get caught.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .............. 9-2

Fuel recommendation .................................................... 9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .................. 9-5

Recommended SAE viscosity number ...................... 9-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations ........................................................... 9-6

Specifications ........................................................................ 9-8

Engine ................................................................................ 9-8

Wheels and tires.............................................................. 9-9

Dimensions and weights ............................................... 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ................................................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification ......................................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ............... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (chassis number).... 9-10

Engine serial number ................................................... 9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ................ 9-11

Emission control information label ........................... 9-11

Tire and loading information label ............................ 9-12

Air conditioner specification label ............................ 9-12

Installing front license plate ............................................. 9-13

Vehicle loading information ............................................. 9-14

Terms ............................................................................... 9-14

Vehicle load capacity.................................................... 9-15

Loading tips .................................................................... 9-17

Measurement of weights ............................................. 9-17

Towing a trailer ................................................................... 9-18

Maximum load limits .................................................... 9-18

Towing safety ................................................................ 9-19

Flat towing............................................................................. 9-22

Automatic transmission................................................ 9-23

Manual transmission ..................................................... 9-23

Uniform tire quality grading ............................................. 9-23

Emission control system warranty ................................. 9-24

Reporting safety defects (US only) ............................... 9-24

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test

(US only) .............................................................................. 9-25

Event data recorders ......................................................... 9-26

Owner’s manual/service manual order information ... 9-26

In the event of a collision ........................................... 9-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAPACITIES AND

RECOMMENDED FUEL/

LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)

Recommended

specifications

measure

Imp

measure

Liter

Fuel

20 gal

16-5/8 gal

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

Engine oil (Drain and refill)*2

¼ API Certification Mark*3, *4

¼ API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*3, *4

¼ ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*2, *3

With oil filter change

5 qt

4-1/8 qt

3-7/8 qt

4.7

4.4

Without oil filter change

4-5/8 qt

Cooling system

With reservoir

9-1/4 qt

7/8 qt

—

7-5/8 qt

3/5 qt

—

8.7

0.8

—

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*5

Reservoir

Automatic transmission fluid

Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity

SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

Manual transmission gear oil

Differential gear oil

—

Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity SAE

80W-90*6

Power steering fluid (PSF)

Brake and clutch fluid

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*7

Refill to the proper fluid level according to the instructions in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*8 or equivalent DOT 3 (U.S. FMVSS No. 116)

NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Multi-purpose grease

—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

Air conditioning system lubricants

Windshield washer fluid

HFC-134a (R-134a)*9

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*3: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.

*4: For additional information, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section.

*5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission

durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*6: For hot areas, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).

*7: For Canada, Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON^TMIII/MERCON^TMor equivalent ATF may also be used.

*8: Available in mainland US through a NISSAN dealer.

*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cata-

lyst.

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN

vehicle limited warranty.

Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos-

sible.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the auto-

mobile manufacturers developed this specifica-

tion to improve emission control system and

vehicle performance. Ask your service station

manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC

specifications.

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accelera-

tion.

The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

If an oxygenate-blend, excepting

methanol blend, is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

CAUTION

Reformulated gasoline

Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol (me-

thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of ap-

propriate cosolvents and corrosion in-

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

hibitors. If not properly formulated with

appropriate cosolvents and corrosion

inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or ve-

hicle performance problems. At this

time, sufficient data is not available to

ensure that all methanol blends are

suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

NISSAN dealer or other competent service fa-

cility.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel in-

jector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve de-

posit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-

cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,

varnish or deposit removal may contain active

solvents or similar ingredients that can be harm-

ful to the fuel system and engine.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is no

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as

engine stalling and hard hot starting are experi-

enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, imme-

diately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel

with a low blend of MTBE.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the above stated

octane rating, or if you hear steady spark

knock while holding a steady speed on

level roads, have your dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-

ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, or-

ange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,

after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause

excessive fuel consumption or damage to the

engine. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

that the engine oil viscosity be selected based

on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change. The “Rec-

ommended SAE viscosity number” chart (on the

next page) shows the recommended oil viscosi-

ties for the expected ambient temperatures.

Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recom-

mended could cause serious engine damage.

STI0367A

Selecting the correct oil filter

API certification mark

API service symbol

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifi-

cation mark on the front of the container. Oils

which do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

Change intervals

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satis-

factory engine life and performance. See “Ca-

pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” ear-

lier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use

of an energy conserving oil in order to improve

fuel economy.

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the

specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals

longer than recommended could reduce engine

life. Damage to engines caused by improper

maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the

new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY

NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or the

exact equivalents.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

CAUTION

driving in dusty conditions

extensive idling

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-

cant will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require the

replacement of all air conditioner sys-

tem components.

towing a trailer

stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling of

any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner

system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

TI1028-C

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all

ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or

10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the

ambient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your

air conditioner system.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model

VQ35DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle

Type

Cylinder arrangement

Bore x Stroke

6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

213.5 (3,498)

in (mm)

cu in (cm³)

Displacement

TI0001-A

Firing order

1-2-3-4-5-6*1

Idle speed

rpm

The spark ignition system of this vehicle

meets all requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-

tions.

See the emission control label on the

underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)

CO percentage at idle speed

degree/rpm

[No air] %

Standard

Service option

in (mm)

PLFR5A-11

Spark plug

PLFR4A-11 (Hot), PLFR6A-11 (Cold)

0.043 (1.1)

Spark plug gap (Normal)

Camshaft operation

Timing chain

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Vehicle body

Coupe

169.8 (4,314)

71.5 (1,815)

52.1 (1,323)

60.5 (1,536)

Roadster

169.8 (4,314)

71.5 (1,815)

52.5 (1,333)

60.5 (1,536)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

in (mm)

Offset

Model

Type

Position

Size

in (mm)

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

18 x 8JJ

18 x 8-1/2JJ

18 x 9JJ*

19 x 10JJ*

18 x 8JJ

18 x 8-1/2JJ

1.18 (30)

1.30 (33)

1.18 (30)

1.30 (33)

Coupe

Aluminum

60.6 (1,540)*1

60.9 (1,546)*2

Roadster

Rear tread

Wheelbase

in (mm)

lb(kg)

60.6 (1,540)

Tire

104.3 (2,650)

Model

Type

Position

Size

Pressure (COLD)

240 kPa (35 psi)

Gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR)

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

225/45R18 91W

245/45R18 96W

Conventional

See the F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. cer-

tification label on the driver’s side

lock pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

(GAWR)

Coupe

245/40R18 93W* 240 kPa (35 psi)

265/35R19 94W* 240 kPa (35 psi)

T145/80D17 107M 420 kPa (60 psi)

240 kPa (35 psi)

T145/80D17 107M 420 kPa (60 psi)

Spare

—

Front

Rear

lb(kg)

Front

Rear

225/45R18 91W

245/45R18 96W

Conventional

Spare

Road-

ster

—

*1: For model with 245/45R 18 tires

*2: For model with 265/35R 19 tires

*: For option

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

WHENTRAVELING OR

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN

ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country,

you should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may

cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded engine gaso-

line. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

STI0320

STI0321

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

The number is stamped as shown.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

STI0303C

STI0322

STI0323

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is af-

fixed as shown. This label contains valuable

vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle

Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review

it carefully.

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

STI0366

STI0325

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The cold tire inflation pressure is shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed

inside of the hood as shown.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-12 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE

PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.

License plate bracket

J-nut x 2

Screw x 2

Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket

while aligning points k of the front bumper

fascia with holes k in the license plate

bracket.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes k

using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked

locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes

through the fascia, or damage to the nut

may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grom-

met hole to add 90° turn onto the part k.

6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

STI0446

7. Install the license plate bracket with screws.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

VEHICLE LOADING

INFORMATION

8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no

longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

WARNING

¼ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a

vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

¼ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

¼ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined weight

of the unloaded vehicle, passengers,

luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and

any other optional equipment. This in-

¼ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

formation

located

the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

¼ Be sure everyone in your ve-

hicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

¼ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion

located

the

TERMS

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

¼ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - maximum total weight rating

of the vehicle, passengers, cargo and

trailer.

¼ CurbWeight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

¼ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load (pas-

sengers and cargo) for the vehicle.

This is the maximum combined weight

of occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is

used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue

weight must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Information

label.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the fol-

lowing illustration.

¼ Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-

pants from the load limit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs) or

(640 − 340 (5 × 70) = 300 kg)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

STI0447

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces

the available cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

your vehicle’s placard.

Steps for determining correct load

limit

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your

vehicle. See “Measurement of Weights”

later in this section.

not place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

vehicle’s warranty.

collision,

unsecured

cargo

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

could cause personal injury.

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of

your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded,

drive to a scale and weigh the front and

the rear wheels separately to determine

axle loads. Individual axle loads should

not exceed either of the gross axle weight

ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the gross ve-

hicle weight rating (GVWR). These rat-

ings are given on the vehicle certification

label. If weight ratings are exceeded,

move or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

¼ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change

the way your vehicle handles.

This could result in loss of con-

trol and cause personal injury.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

LOADING TIPS

¼ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel.

¼ Overloading not only could

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

long braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure, which could result in a se-

rious accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by over

loading are not covered by the

¼ Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

¼ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

TOWING A TRAILER

Roadster model:

Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

CAUTION

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Coupe model:

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures are not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties.

For the first 500 miles (800 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50

mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your ve-

hicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-

member that towing a trailer places additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steer-

ing, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com/

www.infiniti.com. This guide includes information

on trailer towing capability and the special

equipment required for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000

lb(454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer

weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads

greater than 1,000 lb(454 kg) or using improper

towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle

handling, braking and performance.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

The ability of a vehicle to tow a trailer is not only

related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the

places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate

for level highway driving may have to be reduced

on very steep grades or in low traction situations

(for example, on slippery boat ramps).

CAUTION

Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (800 km).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

Unit: lb(kg)

MAXIMUM

TOWING LOAD

1,000 (454)

100 (45.4)

MAXIMUM

TONGUE LOAD

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle and trailer.

Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to

the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or

property damage due to sway caused by cross-

winds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

TI1011M

TI1012M

Tongue load

Maximum gross vehicle weight/

maximum gross axle weight

Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the

total trailer load within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following Towing

Load/Specification chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Hitch ball

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle

must not exceed. GVWR shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

gross vehicle weight equals the combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers,

luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other

optional equipment. In addition, front or rear

gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label.

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on top of the ball.

Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

no more than 1/16″ smaller than the hole in

the ball mount.

Safety chains

trailer hitch.

Always use a suitable chain between a vehicle

and the trailer. The safety chain should be

crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not

to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chain to permit turning

corners.

To reduce the possibility of addi-

tional damage if a vehicle is struck

from the rear, where practical, re-

move the hitch and/or receiver when

not in use.

The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads

showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Class I hitch

After the hitch is removed, seal the

bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes,

water or dust from entering the pas-

senger compartment.

Trailer lights

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb(909 kg).

CAUTION

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to

the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb(909 kg) maxi-

mum weight rating, but your vehicle is only

capable of towing the maximum trailer weights

shown in the Towing Load/Specification Chart

earlier in this section.

Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system,

commercially available

power-type module/converter must be

used to provide power for all trailer

lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-

tery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail

light, stoplight and turn signal circuits

Tire pressures

¼ When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

CAUTION

signal source. The module/

Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

converter must draw no more than 15

milliamps from the stop and tail lamp

circuits. Using a module/converter that

exceeds these power requirements may

damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain

The hitch should not be attached to

or affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

¼ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturers’ specifications.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shifts while driving.

speed limits for vehicles that are towing

trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half.

When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and back

up slowly. If possible, have someone guide

you when you are backing up.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for

towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup

into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point be-

tween the sensor and stop light or light switch.

Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle

tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer

wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer

to the vehicle.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so,

and if a vehicle is equipped with automatic

transmission, first apply the parking brake

and block the wheels, and then move the

transmission selector lever into the P (Park)

position. If you move the selector lever to the

P (Park) position before blocking the wheels

and applying the parking brake, the transmis-

sion may get damaged.

Trailer brakes

Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to

all federal, state and/or local regulations. If

not, install any mirrors required for towing

before driving the vehicle.

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

Trailer towing tips

WARNING

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability, and braking per-

formance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.

When going down a hill, shift into a lower

gear and use the engine braking effect.

When going up a long grade, downshift the

transmission to a lower gear and reduce

speed to reduce chances of engine overload-

ing and/or overheating.

Pre-towing tips

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

Be certain a vehicle maintains a level position

when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an

unusual nose-up or nose-down condition;

check for improper tongue load, overload,

worn suspension or other possible causes of

these conditions.

Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

If the engine coolant rises to an extremely

high temperature when the air conditioning

system is on, turn off the air conditioner.

Coolant heat can be additionally vented by

Always drive a vehicle at a moderate speed.

Some states or provinces have specific

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

FLAT TOWING

opening the windows, switching the fan con-

trol to high and setting the temperature con-

trol to the HOT position.

Remember the length of the trailer must also

pass the other vehicle before you can safely

change lanes.

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a ve-

hicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a

motor home.

To maintain engine braking efficiency and

electrical charging performance, do not use

6th gear (manual transmission) or 5th posi-

tion (automatic transmission).

Trailer towing consumes more fuel than nor-

mal circumstances.

Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km).

CAUTION

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakes

to overheat, resulting in reduced braking ef-

ficiency.

Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

Have a vehicle serviced more often than at

intervals specified in the recommended main-

tenance schedule.

When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make

a larger than normal turning radius during the

turn.

Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle,

always tow forward, never backward.

DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-

sion vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground (flat towing). Doing so

WILL DAMAGE internal transmission

parts due to lack of transmission lu-

brication.

Do not use cruise control while towing a

trailer.

Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly

grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,

and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-

hicle speed. This combination will help stabi-

lize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50

miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

When stopped in traffic for long periods of

time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P

(Park) position.

For emergency towing procedures,

refer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

When towing a trailer, change transmis-

sion oil more frequently. For additional

information, see the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal passing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADING

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

WARNING

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking trac-

tion tests, and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

Treadwear

After towing 500 miles, start and idle the

engine with the transmission in Neutral for

two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after

every 500 miles of towing may cause damage

to internal transmission parts.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

EMISSIONCONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(US only)

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following If you believe that your vehicle has a

emission warranties.

defect which could cause a crash or

WARNING

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

For US:

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Emission Defects Warranty

Emissions Performance Warranty

(See Warranty Information Booklet for de-

tails.)

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in in-

dividual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet that comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet, or it has become lost, you may

obtain a replacement by writing to:

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

You may notify NISSAN by contacting

our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-24 Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US

only)

free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647- Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what

7261).

WARNING

is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/

Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control

system.

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic

conditions and obey all traffic laws.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until

the engine coolant temperature gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal operat-

ing temperature).

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a not “ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/

maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the

ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on

steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10

seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If

the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M

test condition is “ready”.

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h),

then quickly release the accelerator pedal

completely and keep it released for at least

10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9

minutes.

If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready”

condition, drive the vehicle through the following

pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition.

If you cannot or do not want to perform the

driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it

for you.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic trans-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-25

EVENT DATA RECORDERS

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

mission gear selector lever in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position or the manual transmis-

sion shift lever in the N position.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of

computers that monitor and control a num-

ber of systems to optimize performance

and help service technicians with diagno-

sis and repair. Some of the computers

monitor emission control systems, braking

systems, engine systems, transmission

systems, tire pressure systems and air bag

systems. Some data about vehicle opera-

tion may be stored in the computers for

use during servicing. Other data may be

stored if a crash event occurs. For example,

air bag readiness, air bag performance and

seat belt use by the driver or passenger

may be recorded. These types of systems

are sometimes called Event Data Record-

ers.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment

procedures, this manual is the same one used by

the factory trained technicians working at

NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine

NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older

NISSAN models.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more

time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac-

ceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine

until step 7 is completed.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company

1-800-450-9491

Special equipment can be used to access

the electronic data that may be stored in

the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not

recorded). NISSAN and NISSAN dealers

have equipment to access some of this

data; others may also have this equipment.

The data may be retrieved during routine

vehicle servicing or for special research. It

might also be accessed with the consent of

the vehicle owner or lessee, in response to

a request by law enforcement, or as other-

wise required or permitted by law.

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Road

Strongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-26 Technical and consumer information

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year

and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

your vehicle. And some states have enacted

laws that restrict insurance companies from

authorizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty. These

laws help protect you, so you can take action to

protect yourself.

Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting speci-

fications — if you want to help it to last and hold

its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,

nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine part.

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Road

Strongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

It’s your right!

For Canada:

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, please con-

tact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number

and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call

the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-

0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will

assist you.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit

unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at

the end of your lease.

Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones

to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate

the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.

Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide

such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine

parts often show premature wear, rust and cor-

rosion.

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know. Many insurance companies rou-

tinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision

parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical and consumer information 9-27

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-28 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

Audio operation precautions .................................. 4-13

Audio system.............................................................. 4-12

Steering wheel audio controls ........................ 4-29

Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD)........................................... 4-26

Automatic

Parking brake check .......................................... 8-21

Parking brake operation.................................... 5-15

Warning light ....................................................... 2-13

Break-in schedule ..................................................... 5-18

Brightness control, Instrument panel ................... 2-27

Bulbcheck/instrument panel.................................. 2-12

Bulbreplacement...................................................... 8-26

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)................................ 5-21

Advanced air bag system........................................ 1-35

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system................................. 1-35

Front passenger air bag and status light ..... 1-37

Side and curtain.................................................. 1-40

Air bag warning labels............................................. 1-43

Air bag warning light .................................... 1-43, 2-15

Air cleaner housing filter.......................................... 8-18

Air conditioner

Anti-glare inside mirror...................................... 3-26

Automatic adjusting function (front

windows)............................................................... 2-41

Automatic passenger seatback tilt

function......................................................... 1-5, 3-17

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)................ 8-12

Driving with automatic transmission........ 5-6, 5-9

Avoiding collision and rollover.................................. 5-5

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 9-2

Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-30

Cargo (See vehicle loading information)............. 2-34

Cargo net .................................................................... 2-34

Catalytic converter, Three-way catalyst ................. 5-3

CD care and cleaning.............................................. 4-29

Child restraints........................................................... 1-17

Booster seats ...................................................... 1-25

Installation on front passenger seat............... 1-20

Precautions on child restraints........................ 1-17

Top tether strap anchor point location ......... 1-24

Child safety................................................................. 1-12

Chimes, Audible reminders..................................... 2-18

Circuit breaker, Fusible link .................................... 8-23

Cleaning exterior and interior .......................... 7-2, 7-5

Clock ............................................................................ 2-31

Clutch fluid.................................................................. 8-13

Coat hook.................................................................... 2-39

Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-9

Air conditioner service ............................. 4-9, 4-12

Air conditioner specification label .................. 9-12

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations..................... 4-12, 9-6

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)............ 4-9

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle

security system)......................................................... 2-20

Alcohol, drugs and driving......................................... 5-5

Anchor point location, Top tether strap .............. 1-24

Antenna........................................................................ 4-30

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).............................. 5-21

Anti-lock brake warning light.................................. 2-12

Appearance care

Battery.......................................................................... 8-15

Battery saver system ......................................... 2-26

Before starting the engine......................................... 5-8

Belts (See drive belts)............................................. 8-17

Booster seats............................................................. 1-25

Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)......................... 5-21

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-13

Brake booster...................................................... 8-22

Brake fluid............................................................. 8-14

Brake pedal check ............................................. 8-21

Exterior appearance care .................................... 7-2

Interior appearance care ..................................... 7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audible reminders ..................................................... 2-18 Brake system ....................................................... 5-20 Cold weather driving................................................ 5-25

Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audio

system)......................................................................... 4-26

Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio

system)......................................................................... 4-21

Compact spare tire................................................... 8-39

Console box................................................................ 2-36

Control panel buttons (models with navigation

system) ........................................................................... 4-2

Controls

Driving

Cold weather driving ......................................... 5-25

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).............................. 5-2

Driving with automatic transmission........ 5-6, 5-9

Driving with manual transmission.......... 5-7, 5-13

Precautions when starting and driving ............ 5-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label............. 9-11

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter................................... 8-18

Changing engine oil and filter......................... 8-10

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)... 2-28

Flat tire............................................................................ 6-2

Flat towing .................................................................. 9-22

Floor mat cleaning....................................................... 7-5

Fluid

Economy, Fuel............................................................ 5-18

Elapsed time............................................................... 2-10

Emission control information label........................ 9-11

Emission control system warranty......................... 9-24

Engine

Control panel buttons (display with

navigation system) ................................................ 4-2

Heater and air conditioner controls

(automatic) .............................................................. 4-9

Steering wheel audio controls ........................ 4-29

Coolant

Before starting the engine.................................. 5-8

Break-in schedule............................................... 5-18

Capacities and recommended fuel/

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)................ 8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-13

Brake fluid............................................................. 8-14

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine coolant.................................... 8-9

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8

Corrosion protection................................................... 7-6

Cruise control............................................................. 5-16

Cup holders................................................................ 2-35

Curtain side-impact air bag system ..................... 1-40

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine coolant.................................... 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter......................... 8-10

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8

Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-10

Coolant temperature gauge ............................... 2-6

Engine block heater........................................... 5-26

Engine compartment check locations.............. 8-7

Engine cooling system......................................... 8-8

Engine oil.............................................................. 8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation......... 9-5

Engine oil viscosity ............................................... 9-5

Engine serial number......................................... 9-11

Engine specifications ........................................... 9-8

If your vehicle overheats...................................... 6-9

Oil pressure gauge............................................... 2-7

Starting the engine ............................................... 5-9

Event data recorders................................................ 9-26

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Engine coolant....................................................... 8-8

Engine oil.............................................................. 8-10

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-13

Window washer fluid......................................... 8-14

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player............................................................................ 4-19

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer........................................................................ 4-23

Front manual seat adjustment .................................. 1-3

Front passenger air bag and status light............ 1-37

Front power seat adjustment........................... 1-3, 1-4

Fuel

Daytime running light system................................. 2-26

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch............................................. 2-24

Dimensions and weights............................................ 9-9

Display controls (See control panel buttons),

With navigation system.............................................. 4-2

Door open warning light.......................................... 2-13

Drive belts................................................................... 8-17

Average fuel consumption................................ 2-10

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Distance to empty................................................. 2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-2

Fuel economy ...................................................... 5-18

Fuel octane rating ................................................. 9-3

Fuel recommendation........................................... 9-3

Fuel-filler cap....................................................... 3-23

Fuel-filler door...................................................... 3-23

Gauge ...................................................................... 2-6

Fuses............................................................................ 8-22

Fusible links ................................................................ 8-23

Headlight switch................................................. 2-25

Xenon headlights................................................ 2-25

Heated seats.............................................................. 2-29

Heater

Engine block heater........................................... 5-26

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)............ 4-9

HomeLink Universal Transceiver......................... 2-43

Hood release ................................................................ 3-8

Hook, Coat hook ....................................................... 2-39

Horn.............................................................................. 2-28

Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry

system) ........................................................................... 3-5

Keys................................................................................. 3-2

Labels

Air bag warning labels ...................................... 1-43

Air conditioner specification label .................. 9-12

Emission control information label ................. 9-11

Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal

Transceiver.................................................................. 2-43

Gas cap....................................................................... 3-23

Gauge............................................................................. 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge .................. 2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge.................................. 2-7

Fuel gauge.............................................................. 2-6

Odometer................................................................ 2-4

Speedometer.......................................................... 2-4

Tachometer............................................................. 2-5

Trip computer......................................................... 2-8

Volt meter................................................................ 2-8

General maintenance.................................................. 8-2

Golf bag stowing....................................................... 2-37

Engine serial number......................................... 9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 9-11

Tire and Loading Information label..... 8-32, 9-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN)................ 9-10

License plate, Installing front license plate......... 9-13

Light

Ignition switch............................................................... 5-6

Automatic transmission models................ 5-6, 5-9

Key positions.......................................................... 5-7

Manual transmission models .................. 5-7, 5-13

Immobilizer system.................................................... 2-20

Indicator lights............................................................ 2-16

Inside

Automatic anti-glare mirror............................... 3-26

Mirror...................................................................... 3-26

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ........................ 9-25

Instrument brightness control ................................ 2-27

Instrument panel........................................................... 2-2

Instrument pocket...................................................... 2-33

Interior light replacement......................................... 8-28

Interior lights............................................................... 2-41

Interior trunk lid release........................................... 3-11

Air bag warning light ......................................... 1-43

Bulbreplacement ............................................... 8-26

Headlight switch................................................. 2-25

Headlights bulb replacement........................... 8-27

Indicator lights..................................................... 2-16

Interior lights ........................................................ 2-41

Luggage compartment light............................. 2-42

Map lights............................................................. 2-41

Replacement........................................................ 8-26

Room light ............................................................ 2-41

Trunk light............................................................. 2-43

Vanity mirror light................................................ 2-42

Warning/indicator lights and audible

Hatch, Rear hatch........................................................ 3-9

Hazard warning flasher switch............................... 2-28

Head restraints............................................................. 1-9

Headlights

reminders.............................................................. 2-12

Bulbreplacement ............................................... 8-27

Jump starting................................................................. 6-7

Xenon headlights................................................ 2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-3

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-28

Loading information (See vehicle loading

information) ................................................................. 9-14

Lock

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .................. 3-26

Inside mirror ......................................................... 3-26

Outside mirrors ................................................... 3-27

Parking

Parking brake break-in ...................................... 5-21

Parking brake check .......................................... 8-21

Parking brake operation.................................... 5-15

Parking on hills.................................................... 5-19

Phone, Car phone or CB radio ............................. 4-30

Power

Front seat adjustment................................. 1-3, 1-4

Power door lock.................................................... 3-3

Power outlet......................................................... 2-32

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-13

Power steering system...................................... 5-20

Power windows................................................... 2-39

Pre-tensioner seat belt system.............................. 1-42

Precautions

Audio operation................................................... 4-13

Braking precautions........................................... 5-20

Child restraints.................................................... 1-17

Cruise control...................................................... 5-16

Maintenance ........................................................... 8-5

Seat belt usage................................................... 1-10

Supplemental restraint system........................ 1-28

When starting and driving .................................. 5-2

Push starting................................................................. 6-9

Door locks............................................................... 3-3

Power door lock.................................................... 3-3

Rear floor box...................................................... 2-36

Rear hatch lock...................................................... 3-9

Top latch lever..................................................... 3-16

Trunk lid................................................................. 3-10

Low tire pressure warning light............................. 2-14

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire

Net

Cargo net.............................................................. 2-34

Ventilated net seats.............................................. 1-6

New vehicle break-in................................................ 5-18

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System................... 2-20

Engine start............................................................. 5-8

pressure monitoring system (TPMS))..................... 5-3

Luggage compartment light.................................... 2-42

Odometer....................................................................... 2-4

Oil

Maintenance

Battery ................................................................... 8-15

General maintenance ........................................... 8-2

Inside the vehicle................................................... 8-3

Maintenance information (display) .................... 4-3

Maintenance precautions.................................... 8-5

Maintenance requirements.................................. 8-2

Outside the vehicle............................................... 8-2

Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-16

Under the hood and vehicle............................... 8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)........................... 2-16

Manual front seat adjustment ................................... 1-3

Map lights.................................................................... 2-41

Meter, Trip computer .................................................. 2-8

Meters and gauges ..................................................... 2-3

Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine oil and filter......................... 8-10

Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-10

Engine oil.............................................................. 8-10

Engine oil pressure gauge.................................. 2-7

Engine oil viscosity ............................................... 9-5

Opening the soft top................................................ 3-13

Outside air temperature display............................... 2-9

Outside mirrors.......................................................... 3-27

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats......................... 6-9

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

Radio ............................................................................ 4-12

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-30

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

information................................................................... 9-26

control .......................................................................... 2-27

player ..................................................................... 4-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-4

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc

Larger children .................................................... 1-13

Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-42

Precautions on seat belt usage...................... 1-10

Pregnant women................................................. 1-13

Seat belt cleaning................................................. 7-6

Seat belt extenders............................................ 1-16

Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-16

Soft top indicator light........................... 2-18, 3-17

Soft top operation .............................................. 3-13

Spark plugs................................................................. 8-18

Speed

Average speed .................................................... 2-10

Speed indicator ..................................................... 2-9

Speedometer ................................................................ 2-4

Starting

(CD) changer....................................................... 4-23

Steering wheel audio controls ........................ 4-29

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test (US only) ............................................................. 9-25

Rear floor box............................................................. 2-36

Rear hatch ..................................................................... 3-9

Rear hatch opener....................................................... 3-9

Rear parcel box ......................................................... 2-37

Rear power point....................................................... 2-32

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch........................................................................... 2-24

Rear window wiper and washer switch .............. 2-23

Recorders, Event data ............................................. 9-26

Registering your vehicle in another country....... 9-10

Remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-5

Reporting safety defects (US only)...................... 9-24

Rollover........................................................................... 5-5

Roof, Soft top............................................................. 3-13

Room light................................................................... 2-41

Seat belt warning light...................................... 2-15

Seat belts ............................................................. 1-10

Shoulder belt arm............................................... 1-16

Small children...................................................... 1-13

Three-point type with retractor ....................... 1-14

Seat lever, Tilting passenger’s seat........................ 1-7

Seat(s)

Heated seats........................................................ 2-29

Seats ........................................................................ 1-2

Ventilated net seats.............................................. 1-6

Seatback tilt cancel switch ....................................... 1-8

Secondary rear hatch release................................ 3-10

Secondary trunk lid release.................................... 3-12

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start............................................... 2-20

Security system, Vehicle security system ........... 2-19

Selector lever, Shift lock release .......................... 5-12

Servicing air conditioner................................. 4-9, 4-12

Shift lock release, Transmission............................ 5-12

Shifting

Before starting the engine.................................. 5-8

Jump starting.......................................................... 6-7

Precautions when starting and driving ............ 5-2

Push starting .......................................................... 6-9

Starting the engine ............................................... 5-9

Status light, Front passenger air bag .................. 1-37

Steering

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-13

Power steering system...................................... 5-20

Steering wheel switch for audio controls..... 4-29

Tilting steering wheel......................................... 3-25

Stopwatch................................................................... 2-10

Storage ........................................................................ 2-33

Stowing golf bags..................................................... 2-37

Sun visors ................................................................... 3-25

Sunglasses holder .................................................... 2-34

Supplemental air bag warning labels................... 1-43

Supplemental air bag warning light.......... 1-43, 2-15

Supplemental restraint system............................... 1-28

Precautions on supplemental restraint

Safety

Child seat belts................................................... 1-12

Reporting safety defects (US only)................ 9-24

Towing safety....................................................... 9-19

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment............................ 1-3

Front power seat adjustment.................... 1-3, 1-4

Seat belt(s)

Automatic transmission .............................. 5-6, 5-9

Manual transmission ................................. 5-7, 5-13

Shoulder belt arm...................................................... 1-16

Side air bag system.................................................. 1-40

Soft top

system.................................................................... 1-28

Supplemental side and curtain side-impact

air bag system............................................................ 1-40

Switch

Child safety .......................................................... 1-12

Infants .................................................................... 1-13

Injured persons.................................................... 1-14

Care and cleaning................................................. 7-2

If the top does not open or close.................. 3-19

Audio control steering wheel switch ............. 4-29

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-5

Headlight switch................................................. 2-25

Ignition switch........................................................ 5-6

Ignition switch automatic transmission

models ............................................................ 5-6, 5-9

Ignition switch manual transmission

models.......................................................... 5-7, 5-13

Power door lock switch....................................... 3-4

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch..................................................................... 2-24

Traction control system (TCS) off switch .... 2-30

Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-27

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-30

Tire pressure........................................................ 8-30

Tire pressure indicator ...................................... 2-10

Tire pressure monitoring system

Trunk light............................................................. 2-43

Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-12

Trunk lid................................................................. 3-10

Turn signal switch..................................................... 2-27

(TPMS)............................................................ 5-3, 6-2

Tire rotation.......................................................... 8-37

Types of tires....................................................... 8-36

Uniform tire quality grading.............................. 9-23

Wheel/tire size....................................................... 9-9

Wheels and tires ................................................ 8-30

Top, Soft top .............................................................. 3-13

Towing

Flat towing............................................................ 9-22

Tow truck towing................................................ 6-10

Towing a trailer.................................................... 9-18

Towing load/specification chart...................... 9-18

Towing safety....................................................... 9-19

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ...... 5-3, 6-2

Traction control system (TCS)............................... 5-22

Traction control system (TCS) off switch........... 2-30

Trailer towing.............................................................. 9-18

Transceiver, HomeLink Universal

Underbody cleaning.................................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading .................................... 9-23

Up-shift indicator (M/T models) ............................ 5-14

Up-shift indicator setting (rpm) (M/T models)... 2-11

Vanity mirror light ...................................................... 2-42

Vehicle

Tachometer.................................................................... 2-5

Temperature display.................................................... 2-9

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature

gauge.............................................................................. 2-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start................................................................. 2-20

Three-way catalyst....................................................... 5-3

Tilting passenger’s seat ............................................. 1-7

Tilting steering wheel ............................................... 3-25

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning

Dimensions and weights..................................... 9-9

Identification number (VIN)............................... 9-10

Loading information............................................ 9-14

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)................. 6-12

Security system................................................... 2-19

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-30

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system........ 5-23

Ventilated net seats..................................................... 1-6

Ventilators...................................................................... 4-8

Volt meter ...................................................................... 2-8

Transceiver.................................................................. 2-43

Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)................ 8-12

Driving with automatic transmission........ 5-6, 5-9

Driving with manual transmission.......... 5-7, 5-13

Transmission selector lever lock release...... 5-12

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system)... 3-5

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country ......................................................................... 9-10

Trip computer ............................................................... 2-8

Trip odometer............................................................. 2-10

Trunk

light ............................................................................... 2-14

Tires

Flat tire..................................................................... 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system.................... 5-3

Spare tire.............................................................. 8-39

Tire and Loading information label................. 8-32

Tire and Loading Information label................. 9-12

Tire chains............................................................ 8-37

Tire dressing........................................................... 7-4

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .............. 1-43

Warning light

Air bag warning light.............................. 1-43, 2-15

Anti-lock brake warning light........................... 2-12

Interior trunk lid release .................................... 3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-6

Brake warning light ............................................ 2-13

Door open warning light................................... 2-13

Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-14

Seat belt warning light...................................... 2-15

Warning lights............................................................ 2-12

Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ............ 2-28

Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) .................................................................. 5-3, 6-2

Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders..................................................................... 2-12

Warranty, Emission control system warranty..... 9-24

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch........ 2-23

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-22

Washing......................................................................... 7-2

Waxing............................................................................ 7-3

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ............... 9-9

Wheel/tire size.............................................................. 9-9

Wheels and tires....................................................... 8-30

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ....................... 7-4

Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-14

Window(s)

Automatic adjusting function ........................... 2-41

Cleaning................................................................... 7-3

Power windows................................................... 2-39

Windshield wiper and washer switch.................. 2-22

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switch........ 2-23

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-22

Wiper blades ....................................................... 8-19

Xenon headlights....................................................... 2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-7

MEMO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10-8

GAS STATIONINFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

COLD TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURES:

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cata-

lyst.

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

See Tire and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver’s side center pillar.

Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN

vehicle limited warranty.

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCEDURES

RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of ve-

hicle use, follow the recommendations outlined

in the “Break-in schedule” information found in

the “5. Starting and driving” section of this

Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommenda-

tions for the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle.

Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos-

sible.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Techni-

cal and consumer information” section.

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accelera-

tion.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

API Certification Mark

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II

or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving

ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

CAUTION

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all

ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30 viscos-

ity oil may be used for ambient temperatures

above 0°F (−18°C).

Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for engine oil and oil filter

Under no circumstances should a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

recommendation.

QUICK REFERENCE

1. Engine oil (P.8-10)

2. Brake fluid (P.8-13)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)

4. Fuel-filler door release (P.3-23)

5. Hood release (P.3-8)

6. Seat belt (P.1-10)

7. Door lock/key (P.3-2)

8. Rear hatch release (Coupe) (P.3-9) or Trunk

lid release (Roadster) (P.3-10)

9. Engine coolant (P.8-8)

10. Window washer fluid (P.8-14)

11. Power steering fluid (P.8-13)

12. Battery (P.8-15)

13. Audio system (P.4-12)/

Heater and air conditioner (P.4-9)

14. Soft top (Roadster models) (P.3-13)

15. Fuel (P.3-23, P.9-3)

16. Spare tire (P.6-3, P.8-39)

STI0364

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing: July 2006 (23)

Publication No.: OM6E-0Z33U1

Printed in Japan

Z33-D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MTD Yard Vacuum RGBV3100E User Manual
Murphy Switch PSB User Manual
Napoleon Fireplaces Indoor Fireplace BGD48N User Manual
Nike Heart Rate Monitor Triax C5 User Manual
Olympus Microcassette Recorder DS 150 User Manual
Orion Car Audio Car Speaker XTR402 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TG2238S User Manual
Panasonic Smoke Alarm 6295 User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card 1060 AC Powered User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card SL402X User Manual